(revert-buffer, recover-file): Bind
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d9c9b920 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-10-12
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e 29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
8628686a
DL
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
31build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
32necessary changes to unexec.
f4988be7 33
d9c9b920
DL
34** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
35new display features described below.
36
e90813b8 37** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
a7c13351 38all of the new display features described below. The port currently
e90813b8 39lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support.
d9c9b920 40
1fa28578
GM
41\f
42* Changes in Emacs 21.1
43
c607d53d 44** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
346598f1 45trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
c607d53d
SS
46this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
47
4104194e
GM
48** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
49be added to the end of the buffer because of `require-final-newline'.
50
c6f01e00
MB
51** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
52To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
53`auto-compression-mode' command.
54
4c724b32
DL
55** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
56`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
57
b856f39c 58+++
068127d6
GM
59** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
60operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
61
fd06c7da
MB
62** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
63(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
64remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
65may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
66
8ac08dea 67+++
62c273d7
DL
68** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
69is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
70
71+++
72** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
73mode `iswitchb-mode'.
74
8ac08dea 75+++
f393cf90
DL
76** Gnus changes.
77
78The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
79four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
80internationalization and mail-fetching.
81
82*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
83many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
84
85If you used procmail like in
86
87(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
88(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
89(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
90(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
91
327652be 92this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
93
94(setq mail-sources
95 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
96 :suffix ".in")))
97
98More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
99Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
100
101*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
102Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
4301cf66
DL
103Separate MIME packages like RMIME, SEMI, mime-compose etc., will
104probably no longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
f393cf90 105
60dd7e0e 106*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
4301cf66
DL
107parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
108are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
109now just a compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
110
111*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
112called to position point.
113
114*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
115summary buffers and NOV files.
116
117*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
118of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
119
120*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
121subtly different manner.
122
123*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
124and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
125ever-changing layouts.
126
127*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
128
72190b84 129*** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
f393cf90
DL
130
131** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1328859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
133more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
134empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
135window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
136on.
137
ba9eeda1
GM
138** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
139set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
140file that is already visited under a different name.
141
42ac0ae5
GM
142** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
143nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
144
145** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
146recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
147signaled.
148
ba9eeda1 149** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
150support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
151use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
152buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
153M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
154new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
155
b941a14b 156+++
ba9eeda1 157** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 158and displays information about that.
b941a14b 159
ba9eeda1 160** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
161file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
162
d7b38c05 163** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 164added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
165Postscript files are included.
166
167** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
168`dired-ref.tex'.
169
25ad1371
GM
170** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
171expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
172
173This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
174determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
175mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
176interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
177regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
178associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
179
b856f39c 180+++
f0298744
DL
181** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
182displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
183menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
184menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
185
9a8d84ca
DL
186** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
187a version-dependent component.
188
d76c03ea
GM
189** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
190Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
191will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
192character is still bound as before.
193
3b4fa1b2
DL
194** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
195using that menu.
196
40e857ea 197** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 198suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 199
beb2eb00 200+++
c08398de
DL
201** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
202buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
203contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
204by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
205insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
206the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
207Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
208
db7a3ede 209+++
3d6cd763
GM
210** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
211coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
212escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
213such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
214recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 215always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 216read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
217(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
218RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 219
0b8a3a6d
DL
220** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
221environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
222
424d8b44 223+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
224** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
225point in a pop-up window.
226
6d35b49f 227+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
228** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
229displays all characters in that character set.
230
231** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
232coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
233
a4067978 234+++
5cb6a58e 235** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978 236on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
a5e350c9
SM
237defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
238commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
5cb6a58e 239
424d8b44 240+++
a1b8d58b
GM
241** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
242
6e417ca5
DL
243** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
244been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
245
424d8b44 246+++
5898e075
DL
247** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
248`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
249indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
250indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
251
424d8b44 252+++
abfcc168
GM
253** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
254sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 255(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
256You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
257
424d8b44 258+++
cc181e95
GM
259** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
260on the display using several methods
261
424d8b44 262+++
cc181e95
GM
263- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
264a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
265be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
266
424d8b44 267+++
cc181e95 268- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
5820dead 269equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
cc181e95 270
da4496b6 271- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
272
273- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
274the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
275
424d8b44 276+++
3b4fa1b2 277** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 278an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 279command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 280does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 281
424d8b44 282+++
176256a1 283** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
284`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
285typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 286
dd0add8e
DL
287** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
288characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
289
bf3ba9ac 290+++
699238d9
GM
291** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
292compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
293this behavior.
294
295The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
296compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
297Emacs dump core.
298
424d8b44 299+++
699238d9 300** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 301
7233c5bd
GM
302*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
303whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
304is useful for debugging X problems.
305
306Example:
307
699238d9 308 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 309
100b3cbb
GM
310*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
311visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
312the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
313and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
314visual class names are
315
316 TrueColor
317 PseudoColor
318 DirectColor
319 StaticColor
320 GrayScale
321 StaticGray
322
323Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
324`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
325meaning.
326
327The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
328supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
329`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
330visual.
331
332Example:
333
699238d9 334 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
335
336*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
337specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
338default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
339resource values are `true' or `on'.
340
341Example:
342
699238d9 343 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 344
0d0c76b8
EZ
345** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
346more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
347now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
348
42088c12 349** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 350display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
351shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
352be customized.
c60ea02e 353
424d8b44 354+++
31047e0d
DL
355** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
356
424d8b44 357+++
b02786f9
GM
358** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
359all frames except the selected one.
360
3261c1d8
DL
361** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
362to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
363
ffe36136 364** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
365the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
366MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
367displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
368
0292b49f 369+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
370** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
371MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 372
559cee90
DL
373** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
374read mail from the menu etc.
375
480b5773 376+++
271b4185
GM
377** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
378a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
379
0daee095
GM
380** Changes in Texinfo mode.
381
a5e350c9 382*** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
0daee095
GM
383macros
384
385 Key binding Macro
386 -------------------------
387 C-c C-c C-s @strong
388 C-c C-c C-e @emph
105602b1 389 C-c C-c u @uref
0daee095 390 C-c C-c q @quotation
105602b1 391 C-c C-c m @email
a5e350c9
SM
392 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
393 M-RET @item
394
395*** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
0daee095 396
559cee90
DL
397** Changes in Outline mode.
398
399There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
400`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
401the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
402
327652be 403** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 404
c0a8c108
EZ
405+++
406*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
407with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
408are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
409Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
410buffers to kill, as before.
411
412Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 413i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
414this way.
415
956777b3
GM
416** Changes to Show Paren mode.
417
418*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
419The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
420use. Default is 1000.
421
f6989277 422+++
404fa7d6
DL
423** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
424groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
425
424d8b44
DL
426+++
427** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
428M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
429M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
430buffers.
8964fec7 431
424d8b44 432+++
39783d73
WP
433** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
434under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
435.emacs file.
436
437The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
438determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
439
d35fce81
GM
440** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
441abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
442`directory-abbrev-alist'.
443
a933dad1
DL
444** Faces and frame parameters.
445
446There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
447Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
448`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
449`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
450sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
451for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
452parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
453
454Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
455`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 456`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
457`default' face and vice versa.
458
d80061fa 459+++
f77a4a8a
GM
460** New face `menu'.
461
462The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
463Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
464attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
465
424d8b44 466+++
a933dad1
DL
467** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
468
469The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
470colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
471correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
472the screen gamma of a frame's display.
473
474PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
475in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
476color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
477
478The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
479`ScreenGamma'.
480
481** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
482
483The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
484Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
485oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
486of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
487the text.
488
489** Emacs has a new face implementation.
490
491The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
492font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
493height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
494These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
495specify a font.
496
497Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
498These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
499under Lisp changes, below.
500
501** New default font is Courier 12pt.
502
424d8b44
DL
503+++
504** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
505of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
506otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
507
508** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
509truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
510foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
511customizing face `fringe'.
512
8d0f00fd
MB
513** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
514You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
515
516The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
517versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, now defaults to nil,
518and its use is deprecated.
a933dad1
DL
519
520** LessTif support.
521
424d8b44
DL
522Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
523You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
524
525** Toolkit scroll bars.
526
527Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
528LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
529configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
530bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
531bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
532Emacs.
533
534When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
535Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
536Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
537Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
538define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
539`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
540
541Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
542a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
543directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
544different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
545system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
546add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
547
548The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
549`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
550This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
551image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
552Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
553
554** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
555
556When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
557widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
558Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
559
424d8b44 560+++
a933dad1
DL
561** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
562
563When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
564whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
565defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
566highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
567displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
568whitespace.
569
6e612d4d 570+++
a933dad1
DL
571** Busy-cursor.
572
573Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
574display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
575
424d8b44 576+++
a933dad1
DL
577** Blinking cursor
578
579M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
580terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
581and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
582the group `cursor'.
583
8ac08dea 584+++
a933dad1
DL
585** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
586
587This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
588generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
589See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
590details.
591
592Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
593have to do anything to activate it.
594
595** Tabs and variable-width text.
596
597Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
598defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
599independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
600Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
601
602** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
603
424d8b44 604+++
a933dad1
DL
605*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
606
607 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
608
79dd1637
RS
609The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
610LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 611
79dd1637
RS
612*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
613LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 614
34d90e29 615+++
a933dad1
DL
616** Hscrolling in C code.
617
cc181e95
GM
618Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
619`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
620customized.
a933dad1 621
8ac08dea 622+++
a933dad1
DL
623** Tool bar support.
624
625Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
d9c9b920
DL
626of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
627changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
b97cd2cc
DL
628displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved
629if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome
630icons will be used.
631
632To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
633for specific modes (with copyright assignments). Contributions would
634also be useful manually to touch up some of the PBM icons.
a933dad1 635
424d8b44 636+++
a933dad1
DL
637** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
638
639Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
640mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
641line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
642about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
643in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
644
645Currently, the following actions have been defined:
646
647- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
648buffers.
649
650- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
651M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
652
653- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
654
424d8b44
DL
655- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
656`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
657
658- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
659
660** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
661
662When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 663from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
664non-nil.
665
666** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
667
668Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
669Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
670the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
671italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
672Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
673attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
674on terminals.
a933dad1 675
54a9404d
EZ
676The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
677supported on character terminals.
678
a933dad1
DL
679** Sound support
680
2f516940 681Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 682driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 683supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 684
424d8b44 685+++
a933dad1
DL
686** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
687the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
688forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
689value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
690users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
691even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
692
693The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
694
0e18b431 695+++
a933dad1
DL
696** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
697
698As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
699drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
700`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
701
fdd8bb68 702+++
a933dad1
DL
703** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
704bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
705
706This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
707`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
708variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
709
c5d00c64 710+++
a933dad1
DL
711** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
712
713When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
d9e66103 714value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
a933dad1 715number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 716fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
717
718When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
719value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
720number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 721fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
722
723** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
724notably at the end of lines.
725
726All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
727spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
728
424d8b44 729+++
eee54b0e
DL
730There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
731
a933dad1
DL
732** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
733query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
734after each match to get the replacement text.
735
00782214 736+++
d5483ab1
GM
737** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
738you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 739
424d8b44 740** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
741you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
742lisp-complete-symbol.
743
7af69644 744+++
a933dad1
DL
745** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
746
163ea954 747If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
a299a6f0
GM
748longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
749is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
750minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
a933dad1
DL
751
752- User option: max-mini-window-height
753
754Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
755fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
a299a6f0 756specifies a number of lines.
a933dad1
DL
757
758Default is 0.25.
759
a299a6f0
GM
760- User option: resize-mini-windows
761
762How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
5820dead 763resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
a299a6f0
GM
764grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
765again.
766
767Default is `grow-only'.
768
2f72fd2f
GM
769** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
770
0d43b60d
GM
771** Changes to hideshow.el
772
773Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
774selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
775conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
776
777*** Generalized block selection and traversal
778
779A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
780(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
781which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
782`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
783point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
784(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
785
786If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
787i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
788backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
789the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
790
791*** Isearch support for updating mode line
792
793During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
794blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
795line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
796portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
797is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
798
799To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
800something like this in your .emacs.
801
802 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
803 (lambda ()
804 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
805
327652be
TTN
806*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
807
808Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
809header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
810`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
811moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
812block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
813behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
814useful.
815
816You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
817function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
818of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
819code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
820appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
821
822(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
823 (hs-hide-level 1)
824 (forward-sexp 1))
825(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
826
827The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
828emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
829only for code blocks.
830
831*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
832
833Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
834parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
835display for implementation.
836
837*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
838
839The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
840LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
841which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
842new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
843
844 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
845 hs-show-block C-c C-s
846 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
847 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
848 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
849 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
850 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
851
852These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
853
559cee90
DL
854** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
855
424d8b44 856+++
1b24b888
GM
857*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
858an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
859log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
860
424d8b44 861+++
1b24b888
GM
862**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
863current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
864
865+++
1b24b888
GM
866*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
867in a log file.
eb2aac9d 868
502004be 869+++
1b24b888
GM
870*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
871entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 872
502004be 873+++
1b24b888 874*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
875version number is performed based on regular expressions from
876`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
877Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 878
2c63c979 879*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1b24b888 880
79c78e77
GM
881** Changes to cmuscheme
882
883*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
884`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
885
3476b54a
GM
886** Changes in Font Lock
887
888*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
a5e350c9 889font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
3476b54a 890
2c63c979
SM
891*** multiline patterns are now supported.
892
a5e350c9
SM
893*** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
894the face used for each string/comment.
c607d53d 895
601e0081
SM
896*** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
897Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
898
b3b98592
GM
899** Comint (subshell) changes
900
988cded7
MB
901These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
902include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
903
904*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
905to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
906parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
907user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
908this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
909respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
910feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
911`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
912
913*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
b3b98592
GM
914and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
915
988cded7 916*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
b3b98592
GM
917buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
918buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
919
920The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
921M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
922the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
923
988cded7
MB
924*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
925and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
926see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 927
988cded7 928*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
d648cc45
MB
929saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
930argument, it appends to the file.
931
988cded7 932*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
d648cc45
MB
933(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
934compatibility.
935
0e40b809
EL
936*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
937ring (history).
d648cc45 938
e26cec67
GM
939** Changes to Rmail mode
940
b97cd2cc 941*** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
c0510d27
GM
942set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
943receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
944recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
945`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
946as correspondent.
947
948Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
949mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 950regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 951
3b55acc9
GM
952*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
953to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
954Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
955with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
956for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
957
6a1950ec
GM
958*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
959like `j'.
960
5bb6f079
RS
961*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
962specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 963digest message.
e26cec67 964
993d8b7d
DL
965*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
966in which folder to put messages automatically.
967
400a1ed0
GM
968** Changes to TeX mode
969
a5e350c9 970*** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
400a1ed0
GM
971`latex-mode'.
972
a5e350c9
SM
973*** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
974
975*** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
976
977*** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
c607d53d 978
a933dad1
DL
979** Changes to RefTeX mode
980
981*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
982 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
983 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
984 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
985 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
986 can be edited from that buffer.
987
988*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
989 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
990 `A' to use all marked entries).
991
992*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
993 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
994
995*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
996 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
997 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
998 been cited.
999
38de9631
GM
1000** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
1001The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
1002semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
1003in column 1 are always made leaves.
1004
a933dad1
DL
1005** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
1006has the following new features:
1007
1008*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
1009may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
1010to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
1011time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
1012
1013*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
1014feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
1015file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
1016compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
1017pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1018defaults to 1.
1019
5d94f558 1020** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
1021file names.
1022
424d8b44 1023+++
a933dad1
DL
1024** Tooltips.
1025
1026Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
01242779
DL
1027mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
1028turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
a933dad1
DL
1029
1030Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
1031variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
1032the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
1033tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
1034
424d8b44 1035+++
a933dad1
DL
1036** Customize changes
1037
1038*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
1039`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
1040cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
1041
1042*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1043Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1044default).
1045
0ae51efb
GM
1046*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
1047between custom options. Example:
1048
1049 (defcustom default-input-method nil
1050 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
1051 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
1052 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
1053 :group 'mule
1054 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
1055 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
1056
1057This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
1058current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
1059first in a custom-set-variables statement.
1060
a933dad1
DL
1061** New features in evaluation commands
1062
5e03eb84 1063*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
1064modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1065print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1066customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1067eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1068
5e03eb84
GM
1069*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1070code when called with a prefix argument.
1071
ead53494
GM
1072** Ispell changes
1073
37d8a691 1074+++
bbe15990
EZ
1075*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1076transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1077spell-checks the current buffer.
1078
37d8a691 1079+++
385ff9e3
GM
1080*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1081added.
1082
1083*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1084correction is made and re-checked.
1085
74ec6045 1086*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1087
1088*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1089cases.
1090
1091*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1092on syntax errors.
1093
1094*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1095end of the buffer.
1096
a933dad1
DL
1097** Dired changes
1098
1099*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1100command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1101is, delete only empty directories.
1102
1103*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1104command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1105copy directories recursively.
1106
f6737cde
GM
1107*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1108in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1109the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1110
2f72fd2f
GM
1111*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1112replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1113directory.
1114
7381ae05
MB
1115*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1116a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1117This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1118will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1119accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1120
e024b101
GM
1121*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1122from ls switches.
1123
60b392a7
MB
1124*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1125of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1126which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1127source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1128
a933dad1
DL
1129** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1130use the -f option when sending mail.
1131
b1c609b1
GM
1132** CC mode changes.
1133
1134Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1135current user setups (although it's believed that these
1136incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1137However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1138back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1139compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1140release.
1141
7972fcfc
GM
1142*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1143This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1144of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1145non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1146want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1147have to bother.
1148
1149Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1150situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1151and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1152If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1153the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1154by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1155
b1c609b1
GM
1156*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1157When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1158variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1159take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1160is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1161settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1162possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1163Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1164
1165By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1166special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1167the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1168of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1169above.
1170
1171Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1172when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1173function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1174call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1175then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1176values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1177only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1178function documentation for more info.
1179
1180The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1181especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1182with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1183intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1184such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1185is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1186configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1187global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1188
1189(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1190
1191**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1192This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1193
1194This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1195variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1196completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1197the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1198empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1199style system.
1200
1201**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1202In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1203c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1204as far as possible.
1205
1206*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1207CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1208surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1209chapter about this in the manual.
1210
1211**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1212The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1213recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1214primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1215adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1216
1217**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1218This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1219c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1220
1221**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1222This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1223
1224It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1225Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1226A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1227inside CC Mode.
1228
1229Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1230causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1231the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1232available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1233cc-mode/).
1234
1235**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1236The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1237specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1238literals.
1239
1240**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1241It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1242prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1243you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1244this function.
1245
1246*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1247It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1248to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1249struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1250Thanks to Eric Eide.
1251
1252*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1253It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1254opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1255
1256**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1257
1258*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1259See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1260better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1261and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1262
1263*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1264previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1265the column specified by comment-column.
1266
1267*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1268In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1269is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1270prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1271contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1272don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1273
1274*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1275instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1276arguments.
1277
1278*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1279
1280*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1281c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1282c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1283variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1284Provan).
1285
1286*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1287
c407c570
GM
1288** Makefile mode changes
1289
1290*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1291
5d94f558 1292*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1293Fontlock mode is active.
1294
87be76f6
GM
1295** Isearch changes
1296
3353ef5a
GM
1297*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1298so that searches can be resumed.
1299
1300*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1301respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1302that started the search.
1303
87be76f6 1304*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1305selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1306
c8a8458a 1307+++
87be76f6
GM
1308*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1309
d35fce81 1310Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1311`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1312search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1313before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1314highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1315`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1316
1317The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1318will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1319Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1320using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1321usual snappy response.
1322
1323If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1324matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1325set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1326isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1327
21bc6203 1328+++
35384f06
GM
1329** Changes in sort.el
1330
1331The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1332as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1333new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1334numeric base.
87be76f6 1335
d7b511c4
GM
1336** Changes to Ange-ftp
1337
424d8b44 1338+++
d7b511c4 1339*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1340names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1341sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1342
d7b511c4
GM
1343*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1344ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1345
9d453139
SS
1346*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1347output ^M at the end of lines.
1348
4b9347b3
GM
1349** Shell script mode changes.
1350
1351Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1352derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1353sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1354
79214ddf
FP
1355** Etags changes.
1356
1357*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1358
aca0be23 1359*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1360possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1361{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1362This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1363a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1364
79214ddf
FP
1365*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1366declarations when given the --declarations option.
1367
1368*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1369"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1370
1371*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1372types.
1373
de370c4c 1374*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1375
1376*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1377
1378*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1379are now tagged.
1380
1381*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1382variables are tagged.
1383
1384*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1385
8dc78b52
FP
1386*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1387for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1388
c8d94f86 1389+++
f6737cde
GM
1390** Changes in etags.el
1391
3f6e4b8b
GM
1392*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1393tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1394is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1395
f6737cde
GM
1396*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1397the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1398
1399If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1400FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1401TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1402obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1403
1404TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1405
1406FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1407List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1408
1409A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1410
1411 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1412 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1413 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1414
1415*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1416of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1417
1418*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1419names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1420
424d8b44 1421+++
fbc164de
PE
1422** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1423and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1424LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1425
c3eb1f10 1426+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1427** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1428Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
14298859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1430GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
14318859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1432releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1433(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1434
424d8b44 1435+++
163ea954 1436** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1437remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1438appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1439
1440** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1441
424d8b44 1442+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1443** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1444
6ab8d72d 1445+++
f6499c03 1446** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1447containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1448expression from that list, are not checked.
1449
5d94f558
SS
1450** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1451When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1452and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1453the buffer, just like for the local files.
1454
dc28878c
GM
1455** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1456
df8a9f78 1457+++
95931eb1
GM
1458** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1459displays local abbrevs, only.
1460
54baed30
GM
1461** VC Changes
1462
1463VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1464easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1465Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1466to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1467changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1468`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1469version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1470each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1471file is registered in that backend.
1472
1473When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1474backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1475directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1476master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1477the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1478As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1479
1480The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1481still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1482RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1483vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1484where it doesn't make sense.)
1485
1486The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1487obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1488`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1489
1490*** General Changes
1491
1492The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1493checks are always done now.
1494
327652be 1495VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1496operations.
1497
c286608e
SM
1498`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1499`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1500`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1501
22933be8
AS
1502The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
1503first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
1504current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
1505the working file (``merge news'').
1506
1507The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1508(vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
1509downwards.
1510
1511*** Multiple Backends
1512
1513VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
1514useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
1515repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
1516commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
1517local RCS archives.
1518
1519To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
1520should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
1521backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
1522`vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
1523
1524If you have a file registered in one backend already, you can register
1525it in a second one by using C-x v i (vc-register) again.
1526Alternatively, you can commit changes to another backend (say, RCS),
1527by typing C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a
1528backend name as a revision number). When using the latter approach,
1529VC registers the file in the more local backend if that hasn't already
1530happened, and commits to a branch based on the current revision number
1531from the more remote backend.
1532
1533If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
1534another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
1535any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
1536pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
1537
1538After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
1539changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
1540local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
1541buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
1542
54baed30
GM
1543*** Changes for CVS
1544
1545There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1546default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1547remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1548by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1549regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1550that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1551queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1552
22933be8
AS
1553If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
1554repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
1555revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
1556any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
1557backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
1558number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
1559(vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
1560of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
1561the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
105602b1
EZ
1562automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
1563since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
1564name.)
22933be8 1565
54baed30
GM
1566If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1567repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1568If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
22933be8 1569commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
54baed30
GM
1570current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1571entire directory tree.
1572
1573The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1574"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1575is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1576"watched" by other developers.)
1577
22933be8
AS
1578The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1579(vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
1580an empty argument to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
1581starting at the given directory.
1582
54baed30
GM
1583*** Lisp Changes in VC
1584
1585VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1586add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1587library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1588then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1589a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1590provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1591of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1592you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1593`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1594
a933dad1
DL
1595** New modes and packages
1596
b95b34e5
GM
1597*** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
1598rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
1599shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
1600
1601Features are:
1602
1603- Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
1604 drawn, like this: | \ /
c607d53d 1605 --+-- X
b95b34e5
GM
1606 | / \
1607
1608- Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
1609 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
1610 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
1611 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
1612 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
1613 you are drawing.
1614
1615- Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
1616 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
1617
1618- Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
1619 flood-filling.
1620
1621- Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
1622 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
1623 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
1624 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
c607d53d 1625
b95b34e5
GM
1626- Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
1627 also do without the mouse.
1628
1629- Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
1630 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
1631 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
1632 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
1633 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
1634
1635- Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
1636
1637 lines straight-lines
1638 rectangles squares
1639 poly-lines straight poly-lines
1640 ellipses circles
1641 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
1642 spray-can setting size for spraying
1643 vaporize line vaporize lines
1644 erase characters erase rectangles
1645
1646 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
1647 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
1648 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
1649 drawing.
1650
1651 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
1652 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
1653 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
1654 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
1655
1656- Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
1657 can be turned off).
1658
4473cdd9
JW
1659+++
1660*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1661implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1662It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1663functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1664history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1665will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1666the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1667rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1668all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1669
ff332647 1670+++
90cbf47e
GM
1671*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1672intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1673typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1674on certain projects.
1675
894ca69e 1676+++
90cbf47e 1677*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1678regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1679
d96d6bb0 1680 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1681
1682will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1683face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1684typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1685Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1686appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1687current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1688corresponding file is read.
1689
424d8b44 1690+++
d96d6bb0 1691*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1692Emacs is idle.
1693
31fc5d15
GM
1694*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1695parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1696
5cb6a58e
SM
1697*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1698package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1699be more robust while offering the same functionality.
601e0081
SM
1700`comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
1701comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
5cb6a58e 1702
424d8b44 1703+++
578979ee
GM
1704*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1705facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1706separate Texinfo file.
1707
424d8b44
DL
1708+++
1709*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1710by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1711provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1712`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1713enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1714
424d8b44 1715+++
6abca616
EZ
1716*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1717without invoking external programs.
1718
1719The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1720and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1721`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1722is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1723Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1724
1725The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1726page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1727
719e2c6e 1728+++
5e5dff44
GM
1729*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1730authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1731
1732The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1733the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1734the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1735Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1736even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1737single step.
1738
1739On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1740matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1741probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1742contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1743
424d8b44 1744+++
f7136ee8
GM
1745*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1746unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1747actually modifying content of a buffer.
1748
bbd9b566
GM
1749*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1750PostScript.
1751
1752Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1753
1754The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1755
1756 ; comment (until end of line)
1757 A non-terminal
1758 "C" terminal
1759 ?C? special
1760 $A default non-terminal
1761 $"C" default terminal
1762 $?C? default special
1763 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1764 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1765 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1766 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1767 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1768 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1769 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1770 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1771 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1772 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1773 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1774 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1775 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1776 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1777 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1778
1779Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1780
99453a38
GM
1781*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1782align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1783determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1784example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1785equal signs of assignments.
1786
424d8b44 1787+++
559cee90
DL
1788*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1789paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1790
424d8b44 1791+++
6448a6b3
GM
1792*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1793list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1794buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1795customize the package.
1796
6344985d
GM
1797*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1798
249652b1
GM
1799*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1800replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1801is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1802and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1803not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1804which answers different needs.
1805
424d8b44 1806+++
3476b54a
GM
1807*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1808suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1809expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1810course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1811reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1812to be enabled.
1813
424d8b44 1814+++
8964fec7
SM
1815*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1816containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1817
424d8b44 1818+++
a933dad1
DL
1819*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1820
424d8b44 1821+++
a933dad1
DL
1822*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1823
1824*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1825
8901d1ac
GM
1826Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1827`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1828disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1829`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1830displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1831and background colors.
1832
a933dad1
DL
1833*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1834Pascal) language.
1835
f6499c03 1836+++
a933dad1
DL
1837*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1838the text at point.
1839
1840*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1841
424d8b44 1842+++
8d54eb69
DL
1843*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1844
a933dad1
DL
1845*** whitespace.el ???
1846
ebcfda83
GM
1847*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1848files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1849(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1850interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1851often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1852uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1853codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1854
1855*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1856
1857Here is an example of columns:
1858
1859horse apple bus
1860dog pineapple car EXTRA
1861porcupine strawberry airplane
1862
1863Doing the following settings:
1864
1865 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1866 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1867 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1868 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1869
1870
1871Selecting the lines above and typing:
1872
1873 M-x delimit-columns-region
1874
1875It results:
1876
1877[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1878[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1879[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1880
1881delim-col has the following options:
1882
1883 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1884 before all columns.
1885
1886 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1887 between each column.
1888
1889 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1890 after all columns.
1891
1892 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1893 each column.
1894
1895delim-col has the following commands:
1896
1897 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1898 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1899
424d8b44 1900+++
f507826c 1901*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1902were operated on recently.
1903
1904M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1905
31fc5d15
GM
1906M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1907recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1908
31fc5d15
GM
1909M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1910filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1911file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1912
31fc5d15
GM
1913- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1914- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1915- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1916
31fc5d15
GM
1917The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1918dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1919
8062f458
DL
1920*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1921text.
1922
424d8b44 1923+++
36e24b82 1924*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1925of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1926specific to Message mode.
1927
424d8b44 1928+++
36e24b82
DL
1929*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1930viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1931with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1932
424d8b44 1933+++
aaa659ef
DL
1934*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1935interface to access directory servers using different directory
1936protocols. It has a separate manual.
1937
eee54b0e
DL
1938*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1939for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1940
424d8b44 1941+++
612839b6
GM
1942*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1943
5d94f558 1944*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1945minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1946
399da7e3
DL
1947*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1948with the diary features.
1949
6e417ca5
DL
1950*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1951numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1952
4a27bdfb
GM
1953*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1954Fill mode.
1955
60dd7e0e
DL
1956*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
1957Gnus facilities.
1958
dace60cf
JW
1959*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
1960facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
1961difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
1962they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
a18a342d 1963
965bc065
DL
1964+++
1965** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
1966paragraphs filled as you modify them.
1967
1968+++
1969** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
1970to be visited as images.
1971
a933dad1
DL
1972** Withdrawn packages
1973
1974*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1975functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1976
3261c1d8
DL
1977*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1978
1979*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1980
1981\f
01242779
DL
1982* Incompatible Lisp changes
1983
1984There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
1985may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
1986
1987** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
1988`(format %s foo)' no longer works to remove properties.
1989
1990** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
1991which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
1992may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
1993these properties are active.
1994
4dd4cc14 1995** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
01242779 1996ranges may affect some code.
1c14ba45
DL
1997
1998** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
1999buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
2000make a difference to some code.
2001
4dd4cc14
DL
2002** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
2003operates on the minibuffer.
2004
01242779 2005\f
ce75fd23
GM
2006* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
2007(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
2008
52d89894
GM
2009+++
2010** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
2011alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
2012
693c4692 2013** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum".
4301cf66 2014
1c14ba45 2015+++
6bc92b2e
GM
2016** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
2017deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
2018being deleted.
2019
1c14ba45 2020+++
39e776cd
SM
2021** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
2022
a18a342d 2023+++
1396138a 2024** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
a18a342d
DL
2025If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
2026skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
2027with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
2028C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
2029charset.
2030
4fbdfdcf
MB
2031+++
2032** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
2033the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
2034message.
2035
6a0b0752
MB
2036** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
2037expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
2038
1c14ba45 2039+++
47e351a3
GM
2040** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
2041with the more general `:mask' property.
2042
1c14ba45 2043+++
ba9eeda1
GM
2044** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
2045
a2bd77b8
GM
2046** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
2047backslash.
2048
424d8b44
DL
2049+++
2050** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
2051is running in batch mode. For example,
2052
2053 (message "%s" (read t))
2054
2055will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
2056to standard output.
2057
2058+++
2059** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
2060`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
2061
ead53494
GM
2062** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
2063will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
2064frame or window.
2065
f6499c03 2066+++
27848c01
GM
2067** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
2068were added
2069
2070- Function: remove ELT SEQ
2071
2072Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
2073a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
2074
2075- Function: remq ELT LIST
2076
2077Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
2078comparison is done with `eq'.
2079
1c14ba45 2080+++
27848c01 2081** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 2082
b548072f
GM
2083** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
2084has been changed.
2085
424d8b44 2086+++
07b14857
KH
2087** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
2088without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
2089convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
2090
1c14ba45 2091+++
9662da0b
GM
2092** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
2093or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 2094
7fce7efb
DL
2095** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
2096function was declared obsolete.
2097
1c14ba45 2098+++
5d94f558 2099** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
2100retained as an alias).
2101
f98d3086
SM
2102** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
2103It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
2104is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
2105
87efd256
GM
2106** The new function `window-list' has been defined
2107
39b39373
GM
2108- Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
2109
2110Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
2111omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
2112the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
2113even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
2114minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
2115means never include the minibuffer window.
87efd256 2116
67c9a1d2
GM
2117** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
2118
2119- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
2120
2121Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
2122
2123This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
2124calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
2125argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
2126value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
2127returned.
2128
2129Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
2130if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
2131it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
2132minibuffer even if it is active.
2133
2134Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
2135counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
2136too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
2137and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
2138`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
2139entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
2140
2141ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
2142ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
2143ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
2144ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
2145ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
2146If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
2147Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
2148
ead53494
GM
2149** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
2150event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
2151argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 2152
25fa6deb
GM
2153** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
2154call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
2155message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
2156Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 2157
5d94f558 2158** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
2159meaning no limit.
2160
5d94f558 2161** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
2162coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
2163DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
2164
9b2999d0
DL
2165+++
2166** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
2167list of a primitive.
de370c4c 2168
c286608e
SM
2169** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
2170
9b2999d0 2171+++
80c05bd3
DL
2172** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
2173buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
2174This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
2175than replacing the local map.
2176
4bc7a543
DL
2177** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
2178after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
2179
2180** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2181
f6499c03 2182+++
c286608e
SM
2183** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2184as promised long ago.
f0298744 2185
5d94f558 2186** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
2187\f
2188* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2189
2190Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2191--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2192When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2193so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2194
85c75536
MB
2195*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2196buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2197the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2198restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2199
0b8a3a6d
DL
2200*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2201`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
2202when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
2203multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2204
2205*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2206`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2207contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2208
2209*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2210changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2211[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2212regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2213the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2214extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2215bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2216eight-bit-graphic.
2217
2218** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2219
2220A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
2221a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2222character set as previously.
2223
2224*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2225They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2226modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2227
2228CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2229characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2230range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2231case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2232
2233FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2234name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
2235
2236*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2237registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2238"fontset-default".
2239
2240*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2241argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2242
2243** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2244composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2245buffers and strings.
2246
2247*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2248character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2249code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2250have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2251composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2252composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2253The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2254also been deleted.
2255
2256*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2257specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2258`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2259
2260*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2261MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2262composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2263may differ between buffer and string text.
2264
2265*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2266COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2267
2268*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2269directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2270Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2271`composition' from STRING.
2272
2273*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2274a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2275
2276*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2277obsolete.
2278
965bc065 2279** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
f620908e 2280`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' are introduced
965bc065 2281for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, U+2500..U+33FF,
f620908e 2282U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d
DL
2283
2284** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2285`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
2286X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2287
2288+++
2289** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2290are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 22910xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2292
399da7e3 2293+++
f0124b4a
DL
2294** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2295that offset in the file before writing.
2296
f98d3086
SM
2297** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2298compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2299
612839b6
GM
2300** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2301`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2302from which the command was issued.
2303
2304** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2305`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2306`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2307additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2308operate on.
2309
271b4185
GM
2310** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2311to `window-buffer-height'.
2312
2313- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2314
2315Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2316The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2317lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2318
2319Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2320respectively.
2321
2322If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2323COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2324
2325The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2326obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2327on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2328
2329Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2330buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2331possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2332is currently displayed in some window.
2333
3c30cb6e
DL
2334** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2335argument function's results.
2336
62f20204
GM
2337** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2338signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2339
c0510d27 2340** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2341header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2342
2343** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2344ignores differences in case and text representation.
2345
2346** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2347cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2348as follows:
2349
2350 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2351 nil don't display a cursor
2352 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2353 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2354 others display a box cursor.
2355
9a0dd3dc
GM
2356** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2357an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2358defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2359set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2360
d7b511c4 2361** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2362specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2363the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2364text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2365
2366Example:
2367
2368 (string-to-syntax "()")
2369 => (4 . 41)
2370
1fa28578
GM
2371** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2372other than 10.
2373
2374*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2375INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2376
5d94f558 2377 #b1111
1fa28578 2378 => 15
5d94f558 2379 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2380 => -15
2381
2382*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2383
5d94f558 2384 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2385 => 438
2386
2387*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2388
5d94f558 2389 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2390 => 48815
2391
2392*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2393
5d94f558 2394 #2R-111
1fa28578 2395 => -7
5d94f558 2396 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2397 => 267
2398
3d4ff2dd 2399** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2400the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2401and isn't a string.
2402
3d4ff2dd
GM
2403** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2404a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2405value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2406not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2407
16ce590d
DL
2408+++
2409** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2410
73825616 2411** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2412for a regexp in a string.
2413
2414** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2415`mouse-position-function'.
2416
723e779c
GM
2417** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2418that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2419
d1e103b2
GM
2420** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2421Keywords are now always considered constants.
2422
31047e0d
DL
2423+++
2424** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2425returns it.
2426
7a85e4df
GM
2427** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2428returned by function `recent-keys'.
2429
02b14400
RS
2430+++
2431** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2432can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2433Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2434etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2435mode.
404fa7d6 2436
02b14400 2437+++
8964fec7
SM
2438** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2439and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2440
02b14400
RS
2441+++
2442** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2443has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2444function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2445returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2446been performed."
2447
2448When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2449and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2450hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2451then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2452
02b14400 2453+++
81da8b32
GM
2454** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2455In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2456and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2457
02b14400 2458+++
9e207b90
GM
2459** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2460with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2461specified table.
2462
2463 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2464
2465Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2466TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2467saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2468what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2469
02b14400 2470+++
d7f89643 2471** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2472Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
601e0081
SM
2473Also backreferences like \2 are now considered as an error if the
2474corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
2475Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
8964fec7 2476
02b14400 2477+++
dde9e75a
GM
2478** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2479removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2480
02b14400 2481+++
9da30515
GM
2482** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2483instead of being optional.
2484
02b14400 2485+++
d20679eb
GM
2486** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2487modify read-only text.
2488
02b14400 2489+++
fbc164de
PE
2490** New functions and variables for locales.
2491
2492The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2493decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2494time functions like strftime. The new variables
2495`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2496locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2497
2498The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2499environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2500the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2501environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2502not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2503`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2504`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2505
02b14400 2506+++
863476d1
SM
2507** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2508To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2509modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2510start sequences.
2511
02b14400 2512+++
ef6d912c
GM
2513** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2514because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2515
02b14400 2516+++
a933dad1
DL
2517** New function `propertize'
2518
2519The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2520strings with text properties.
2521
2522- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2523
2524Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2525by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2526PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2527specified value of that property. Example:
2528
2529 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2530
2531+++
2532** push and pop macros.
2533
02b14400
RS
2534Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2535are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2536as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2537
2538(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2539(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2540 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2541
02b14400
RS
2542** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2543
6c7fd5aa
RS
2544Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2545are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2546
2547(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2548 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2549 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2550 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2551
2552(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2553 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2554 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2555 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2556
a933dad1
DL
2557+++
2558** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
2559as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
2560
2561[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2562[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2563[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2564[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2565[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2566 space, and DEL.
2567[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2568 and DEL.
2569[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2570 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2571 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2572[:alpha:] matches letters.
2573 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2574 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2575[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2576[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2577[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2578[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2579 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2580 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2581[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2582[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2583[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2584
2585+++
2586** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2587
2588The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2589
2590- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2591
2592The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2593are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2594
2595:test TEST
2596
2597TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2598Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2599it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2600
2601:size SIZE
2602
2603SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2604many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2605
2606:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2607
2608REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2609full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2610size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
26111.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2612old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2613
2614:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2615
2616THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2617hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2618(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2619
2620:weakness WEAK
2621
b548072f
GM
2622WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2623`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2624`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2625collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2626outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2627
2628- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2629
2630Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2631
2632- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2633
2634Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2635
2636- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2637
2638Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2639values are shared.
2640
2641- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2642
2643Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2644
2645- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2646
2647Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2648
2649- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2650
2651Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2652
2653- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2654
2655Returns the size of TABLE.
2656
d96d6bb0 2657- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2658
2659Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2660
2661- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2662
2663Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2664
2665- Function: clrhash TABLE
2666
2667Clear TABLE.
2668
2669- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2670
2671Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2672not found.
2673
79214ddf 2674- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2675
2676Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2677another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2678
2679- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2680
2681Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2682
2683- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2684
2685Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2686arguments KEY and VALUE.
2687
2688- Function: sxhash OBJ
2689
2690Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2691
2692- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2693
2694Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2695a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2696comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2697and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2698of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2699
2700TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2701
2702HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2703code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2704integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2705
2706Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2707be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2708
2709 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2710 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2711
2712 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2713 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2714
79214ddf 2715 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2716 'case-fold-string-hash))
2717
2718 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2719
2720+++
2721** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2722
2723It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2724circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2725a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2726
2727+++
2728** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2729
2730If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2731#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2732
a933dad1
DL
2733+++
2734** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2735t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2736specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2737is too short to reach that column.
2738
2739+++
2740** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2741now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2742after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2743two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2744
2745If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2746perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2747and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2748
2749+++
2750** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2751to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2752
2753+++
2754** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2755calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2756
2757+++
2758** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2759directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2760small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2761small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2762temporary-file-directory instead.
2763
2764+++
2765** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2766the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2767`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2768hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2769
2770+++
2771** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2772elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2773
2774+++
2775** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2776
2777make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2778creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2779ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2780
2781+++
2782** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2783
2784The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2785on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2786is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2787never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2788ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2789overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2790
2791If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2792that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2793to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2794The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2795
2796+++
2797** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2798
2799Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2800If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2801ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2802result string.
2803
2804Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2805string where arguments appear in the result string.
2806
2807Example:
2808
2809 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2810 (s2 "world"))
2811 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2812 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2813 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2814
2815results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2816
2817+++
2818** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2819
2820Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2821The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2822argument in it.
2823
2824 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2825 (arg "world"))
2826 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2827 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2828 (message msg arg))
2829
2830+++
2831** Sound support
2832
2833Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2834(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2835
2836Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2837(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2838to enable sound support.
2839
2840Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2841list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2842when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2843functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2844sound to play, before playing the sound.
2845
2846The following sound properties are supported:
2847
2848- `:file FILE'
2849
2850FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2851searched relative to `data-directory'.
2852
6fb40beb
GM
2853- `:data DATA'
2854
2855DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2856may be present, but not both.
2857
a933dad1
DL
2858- `:volume VOLUME'
2859
2860VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
28610..1. This property is optional.
2862
01242779
DL
2863- `:device DEVICE'
2864
2865DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
2866sound. The default device is system-dependent.
2867
a933dad1
DL
2868Other properties are ignored.
2869
01242779
DL
2870An alternative interface is called as
2871(play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
2872
a933dad1 2873** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4 2874
9b2999d0 2875+++
356673d4
DL
2876** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2877a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2878
2879** Changes to garbage collection
2880
2881*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2882of live and free strings.
2883
2884*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2885strings that have been consed so far.
2886
a933dad1 2887\f
04545643
GM
2888* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2889Lisp Manual
2890
f7eb32aa 2891+++
a299a6f0
GM
2892** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
2893mini-windows.
2894
9b2999d0 2895+++
a299a6f0 2896** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third argument, FULLY.
ea4c1b7c
MB
2897If FULLY is non-nil, then locations that are partially obscured aren't
2898considered visible.
2899
a299a6f0 2900** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
82a452c8 2901
9a8d84ca
DL
2902+++
2903** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2 2904
9b2999d0 2905+++
2c69ced2
GM
2906** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2907image.
2908
2909- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2910
2911Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2912
2913SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2914measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2915character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2916font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2917FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2918
9b2999d0 2919+++
ebb8f116
GM
2920** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
2921has a mask bitmap.
2922
2923- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
2924
2925Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
2926FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
2927or omitted means use the selected frame.
2928
f6499c03 2929+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
2930** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2931satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2932
2933+++
2934** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2935optional.
2936
f6499c03
DL
2937+++
2938** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
2939below).
04545643
GM
2940
2941\f
a933dad1
DL
2942* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2943
2944Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2945--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2946When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2947so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2948
f6d3257b
GM
2949** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2950to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2951
2952Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2953text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2954is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2955your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2956laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2957just display it black instead.
2958
2959This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2960a line like
2961
2962 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2963
2964in your `.emacs'.
2965
a933dad1
DL
2966** New face implementation.
2967
2968Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2969font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2970
2971+++
2972*** New faces.
2973
2974Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2975
2976 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2977
a933dad1
DL
2978 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2979 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2980
a933dad1 2981 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2982
a933dad1 2983 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2984
a933dad1 2985 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2986
a933dad1 2987 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2988
a933dad1
DL
2989 7. Background color.
2990
2991 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2992
2993 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2994
2995 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2996
2997 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2998
2999 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
3000 color.
3001
3002 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
3003 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
3004
3005Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
3006same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
3007frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
3008faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
3009with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
3010attributes mentioned above.
3011
3012There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
3013definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
3014created frames.
79214ddf 3015
a933dad1
DL
3016A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
3017have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
3018`fully-specified'.
3019
3020+++
3021*** Face merging.
3022
3023The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
3024combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
3025aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
3026properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
3027that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
3028results in a fully-specified face.
3029
3030+++
3031*** Face realization.
3032
3033After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
3034merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
3035realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
3036available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
3037face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
3038cache of the frame on which it was realized.
3039
3040Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
3041character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
3042for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
3043charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
3044
3045Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
3046specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
3047being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
3048the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
3049statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
3050
3051In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
3052`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
30530x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
3054the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
3055initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
3056Emacs.
3057
3058Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
3059`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
3060registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
3061with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
3062
a7c13351 3063+++
a933dad1
DL
3064**** Clearing face caches.
3065
3066The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
3067on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
3068unused fonts.
3069
3070+++
3071*** Font selection.
79214ddf 3072
a933dad1
DL
3073Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
3074given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
3075for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
3076
3077If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
3078pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
3079family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
3080property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
3081an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
3082
3083Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
3084against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
3085match for the given face attributes in this font list.
3086
3087Font selection can be influenced by the user.
3088
3089The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
3090attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
3091face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
3092names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
3093that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
3094width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
3095to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
3096
52d89894
GM
3097Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3098alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
3099doesn't exist. Likewise, `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows to
3100specify alternative font registry names to try.
a933dad1
DL
3101
3102+++
3103**** Scalable fonts
3104
3105Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
3106since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
3107servers.
3108
3109To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 3110`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
3111scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
3112Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
3113scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
3114that list. Example:
3115
3116 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
3117
3118allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
3119
3120+++
3121*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
3122
3123- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
3124
3125Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
3126is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
3127string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
3128
3129If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
3130the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
3131FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
3132POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
3133SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
3134These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
3135if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
3136REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
3137the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
3138of the face font sort order.
3139
79214ddf 3140- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
3141
3142Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
3143omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
3144(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
3145non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
3146
3147- Variable: font-list-limit
3148
3149Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
3150won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
3151matching font. The default is currently 100.
3152
3153+++
3154*** Setting face attributes.
3155
3156For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
3157with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
3158implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
3159`face-attribute'.
3160
3161Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
3162symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
3163
3164The following attributes are recognized:
3165
3166`:family'
3167
3168VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
3169or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
3170and `?' are allowed.
3171
3172`:width'
3173
3174VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
3175It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
3176`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
3177`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
3178
3179`:height'
3180
787345ff
MB
3181VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
3182in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
3183scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
3184height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
3185
3186`:weight'
3187
3188VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
3189symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
3190`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
3191
3192`:slant'
3193
3194VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3195symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3196`reverse-oblique'.
3197
3198`:foreground', `:background'
3199
3200VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3201
3202`:underline'
3203
3204VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3205VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3206a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3207don't underline.
3208
3209`:overline'
3210
3211VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3212VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3213string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3214overline.
3215
3216`:strike-through'
3217
3218VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3219striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3220face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3221is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3222
3223`:box'
3224
3225VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3226around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3227VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3228of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3229and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3230VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3231:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3232the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3233specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3234defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3235the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3236color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3237should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3238like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3239that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3240the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3241box.
3242
3243`:inverse-video'
3244
3245VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3246inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3247
3248`:stipple'
3249
3250If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3251The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3252searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3253HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3254is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3255explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3256
3257For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3258and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3259
3260`:font'
3261
3262Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3263XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3264is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3265versions of Emacs.
3266
3267For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3268be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3269must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3270
3271Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3272`defface'.
3273
787345ff
MB
3274`:inherit'
3275
3276VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3277of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3278like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3279
a933dad1
DL
3280*** Face attributes and X resources
3281
3282The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3283from X resources:
3284
3285 Face attribute X resource class
3286-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3287 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3288 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3289 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3290 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3291 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3292 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3293 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3294 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3295 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3296 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3297 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3298 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3299 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 3300 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
3301 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3302 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3303 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3304 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3305 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3306
3307+++
3308*** Text property `face'.
3309
3310The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3311specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3312specification can be
3313
33141. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3315
33162. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3317 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3318 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3319 for face attribute names.
3320
33213. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3322 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3323 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3324
3325+++
3326** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3327
acf3ecb7
EZ
3328The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3329on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3330the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3331default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3332`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3333used to clear the mapping table.
3334
acf3ecb7
EZ
3335** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3336
3337The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3338and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3339type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3340color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3341display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3342old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3343`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3344compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3345should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3346modify their color-related behavior.
3347
3348The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3349any frame type.
3350
8a5719f0
EZ
3351** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3352
3353The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3354`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3355`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3356`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3357`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3358`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3359display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3360the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3361platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3362
a933dad1
DL
3363+++
3364** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3365
463cac2d 3366This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
3b51cca0
MB
3367To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
3368the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
3369`Inviolable' option.
a933dad1
DL
3370
3371The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3372end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3373Otherwise, it returns zero.
3374
463cac2d
GM
3375** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3376
3377There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3378buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3379property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3380
9a9dfda8 3381Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3382forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3383to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3384not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3385commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3386boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3387`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3388functions.
463cac2d
GM
3389
3390Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3391a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3392editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3393
9a9dfda8
GM
3394The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3395
59927f88 3396- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3397
3398Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3399
9a9dfda8
GM
3400A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3401If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3402constrained position if that is is different.
3403
3404If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3405positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3406ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3407constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3408as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3409is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3410fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3411the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3412also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3413
3414If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3415NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3416unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3417C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3418only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3419
59927f88
MB
3420If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3421a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3422
3423Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3424
3425- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3426
59927f88 3427Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3428A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3429If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3430
3431- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3432
3433Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3434A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3435If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3436If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3437field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3438
3439- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3440
3441Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3442A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3443If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3444If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3445then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3446
3447- Function: field-string &optional POS
3448
3449Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3450A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3451If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3452
3453- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3454
3455Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3456A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3457If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3458
a933dad1
DL
3459+++
3460** Image support.
3461
3462Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3463strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3464(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3465replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3466
3467If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3468`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3469AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3470window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3471area.
3472
3473IMAGE is an image specification.
3474
3475*** Image specifications
3476
3477Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3478is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3479specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3480symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3481described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3482
3483The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3484
3485`:ascent ASCENT'
3486
576da55d
GM
3487ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3488If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3489to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3490
3491If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3492image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3493
5d94f558 3494If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3495centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3496of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3497overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3498
3499`:margin MARGIN'
3500
79214ddf 3501MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3502margin around the image. Default is 0.
3503
3504`:relief RELIEF'
3505
3506RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3507around an image.
3508
3509`:algorithm ALGO'
3510
47e351a3
GM
3511Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3512
3513ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3514edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3515
3516ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3517apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3518nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3519position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3520around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3521neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3522transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3523x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3524below.
3525
3526 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3527 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3528 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3529
3530The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3531resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3532multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3533of the factors' absolute values.
3534
327652be 3535Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3536
47e351a3
GM
3537 (1 0 0
3538 0 0 0
3539 9 9 -1)
3540
3541Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3542
3543 ( 2 -1 0
3544 -1 0 1
3545 0 1 -2)
3546
ba9eeda1
GM
3547ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3548``disabled''.
3549
47e351a3
GM
3550`:mask MASK'
3551
3552If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3553the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3554image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3555background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3556image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3557the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3558GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3559image.
a933dad1 3560
47e351a3
GM
3561If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3562in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3563`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3564
3565`:file FILE'
3566
3567Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3568search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3569building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3570may be present in the image specification.
3571
518df5c4
GM
3572`:data DATA'
3573
3574Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3575supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3576present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3577support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3578
a933dad1
DL
3579*** Supported image types
3580
b246b1f6 3581**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3582
3583XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3584properties supported are
3585
3586`:foreground FG'
3587
3588FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3589is the frame's foreground.
3590
46c5af7f 3591`:background BG'
a933dad1
DL
3592
3593BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3594the frame's background color.
3595
3596XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3597case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3598instead of a `:file' property.
3599
3600`:width WIDTH'
3601
3602WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3603
3604`:height HEIGHT'
3605
3606HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3607
3608`:data DATA'
3609
3610DATA must be either
3611
3612 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3613 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3614
3615 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3616
3617 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3618 bitmap.
3619
c76e04a8
GM
3620 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3621 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3622 in the file.
3623
a933dad1
DL
3624**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3625
3626XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3627`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3628found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3629`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3630
3631Additional image properties supported are:
3632
3633`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3634
3635SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3636name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3637name.
3638
3639XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3640add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3641
a933dad1
DL
3642The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3643to display compressed images.
3644
3645**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3646
3647PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2b8e9c91
GM
3648mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3649mono images are
3650
3651`:foreground FG'
3652
3653FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3654is the frame's foreground.
3655
3656`:background FG'
3657
3658BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3659the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
3660
3661**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3662
3663Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3664package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3665are:
3666
a933dad1
DL
3667**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3668
3669Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3670package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3671properties defined.
3672
3673**** GIF, image type `gif'
3674
3675Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3676`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3677
3678Additional image properties supported are:
3679
3680`:index INDEX'
3681
3682INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3683multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3684
3685This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3686For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3687at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3688every 0.1 seconds.
3689
3690(defun show-anim (file max)
3691 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3692 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3693
3694(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3695 (when (= idx max)
3696 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3697 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3698 (save-excursion
3699 (set-buffer buffer)
3700 (goto-char (point-min))
3701 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3702 (insert-image img "x"))
3703 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3704
3705**** PNG, image type `png'
3706
3707Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3708package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3709properties defined.
3710
3711**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3712
3713Additional image properties supported are:
3714
3715`:pt-width WIDTH'
3716
3717WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3718integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3719
3720`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3721
3722HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3723must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3724
3725`:bounding-box BOX'
3726
3727BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3728the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3729files. This is an required property.
3730
3731Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3732lisp/gs.el.
3733
3734*** Lisp interface.
3735
79214ddf
FP
3736The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3737which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3738
3739Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3740they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3741The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3742manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3743images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3744
3745*** Simplified image API, image.el
3746
3747The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3748creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3749can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3750define an image based on available image types. The functions
3751`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3752buffer.
3753
3754+++
3755** Display margins.
3756
3757Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3758and images.
3759
3760To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3761`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3762`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3763obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3764`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3765the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3766of the display margins.
3767
3768You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3769containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3770one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3771string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3772in this file).
3773
3774+++
3775** Help display
3776
3777Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3778moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3779`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3780that have a `help-echo' property.
3781
9662da0b 3782If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3783is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3784the window in which the help was found.
3785
3786If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3787`help-echo' text property was found.
3788
3789If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3790POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3791
3792If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3793the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3794mouse.
d5aa31d8 3795
9662da0b
GM
3796If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3797string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3798
3799For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3800determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3801property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3802For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3803used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3804
3805The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3806the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3807causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3808
3809+++
3810** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3811
3812The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3813This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3814
3815The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3816scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3817The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3818scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3819used.
3820
79214ddf
FP
3821 (global-set-key [A-down]
3822 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3823 (interactive)
79214ddf 3824 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3825 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3826 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3827 #'(lambda ()
3828 (interactive)
79214ddf 3829 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3830 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3831
3832+++
3833** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3834
3835Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3836when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3837variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3838is called with one argument, POS.
3839
3840At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3841characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3842as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3843property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3844`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3845
3846+++
3847** Tool bar support.
3848
3849Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3850parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3851controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3852suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3853`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3854automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3855
3856*** Tool bar item definitions
3857
3858Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3859`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3860where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3861
a933dad1
DL
3862CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3863evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3864the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3865property (see below).
79214ddf 3866
a933dad1
DL
3867BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3868binding are currently ignored.
3869
3870The following properties are recognized:
3871
3872`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3873
a933dad1
DL
3874FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3875or disabled.
79214ddf 3876
a933dad1 3877`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3878
a933dad1 3879FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3880
a933dad1
DL
3881`:filter FUNCTION'
3882
3883FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3884FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3885used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3886
a933dad1
DL
3887`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3888
3889TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3890and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3891
a933dad1
DL
3892`:image IMAGES'
3893
3894IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3895image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3896meaning of each of the four elements:
3897
3898 Index Use when item is
3899 ----------------------------------------
3900 0 enabled and selected
3901 1 enabled and deselected
3902 2 disabled and selected
3903 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3904
4ba7246d
GM
3905If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3906algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3907
a933dad1 3908`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3909
a933dad1
DL
3910Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3911is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3912
dab96841 3913The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
3914toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
3915to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
3916menu bar.
dab96841 3917
8628686a
DL
3918The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
3919dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
3920buffer-locally to override the global map.
3921
a933dad1
DL
3922*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3923
3924If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3925resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3926than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3927
79214ddf 3928If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3929raised when the mouse moves over them.
3930
3931You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3932`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3933pixels. Default is 1.
3934
3935You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3936`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3937
3938*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3939
3940You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3941a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3942
3943 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3944 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3945 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3946
3947is the original tool bar item definition, then
3948
3949 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3950
3951makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3952item.
3953
3954** Mode line changes.
3955
3956+++
3957*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3958
3959The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3960that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3961a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3962
39631. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3964a `local-map' text property.
3965
39662. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3967that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3968
39693. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3970is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3971`local-map' property.
3972
3973The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3974properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3975example.
3976
54522c9f
GM
3977*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3978evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3979
a933dad1
DL
3980+++
3981*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3982variable mode-line-format to nil.
3983
3984+++
3985*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3986
3987This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3988`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3989completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3990`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3991line.
3992
3993The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3994`header-line'.
3995
3996The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3997position in the header-line.
3998
3999+++
4000** Text property `display'
4001
623a0aae
GM
4002The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
4003replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
4004also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
4005the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
4006below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
4007
623a0aae
GM
4008*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
4009
4010To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
4011text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
4012
4013If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
4014marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
4015the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
4016is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4017simpler form STRING as property value.
4018
a933dad1
DL
4019*** Variable width and height spaces
4020
4021To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
4022specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
4023`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
4024area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
4025marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
4026displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4027simpler form STRETCH as property value.
4028
4029The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
4030PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
4031properties described below.
4032
4033The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
4034characters having the `display' property.
4035
4036- :width WIDTH
4037
4038Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
4039character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
4040
4041- :relative-width FACTOR
4042
4043Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4044first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
4045same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
4046width of that character by FACTOR.
4047
4048- :align-to HPOS
4049
4050Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
4051value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
4052
4053Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
4054
4055- :height HEIGHT
4056
4057Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
4058normal line height.
4059
4060- :relative-height FACTOR
4061
4062The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
4063of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
4064
4065- :ascent ASCENT
4066
4067Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
4068used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
4069baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
4070equal to 100.
4071
4072You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
4073
4074*** Images
4075
4076A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
4077. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
4078in the display, the characters having this display specification in
4079their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
4080the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
4081`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
4082area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
4083the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
4084as display specification.
4085
4086*** Other display properties
4087
c9e73000 4088- (space-width FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4089
4090Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
4091should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
4092integer or float.
4093
c9e73000 4094- (height HEIGHT)
a933dad1
DL
4095
4096Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
4097
4098If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
4099means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
4100the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
4101``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
4102a font is available counts as a step.
4103
4104If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
4105as tall as the frame's default font.
4106
4107If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
4108height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
4109
4110Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
4111`height' bound to the current specified font height.
4112
c9e73000 4113- (raise FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4114
4115FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
4116font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
4117raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
4118amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
c9e73000 4119`height' subproperty.
a933dad1
DL
4120
4121*** Conditional display properties
4122
4123All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
4124has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
4125applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
4126During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
4127the text having the `display' property.
4128
4129The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
4130`(:when t SPEC)'.
4131
4132+++
4133** New menu separator types.
4134
4135Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
4136item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
4137treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
4138to specify other menu separator types.
4139
4140- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
4141
4142No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
4143separator occurs.
4144
4145- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
4146
4147A single line in the menu's foreground color.
4148
4149- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
4150
4151A double line in the menu's foreground color.
4152
4153- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
4154
4155A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4156
4157- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
4158
4159A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4160
4161- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
4162
4163A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
4164displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
4165
4166- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
4167
4168A single line with 3D raised appearance.
4169
4170- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
4171
4172A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
4173
4174- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
4175
4176A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
4177
4178- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
4179
4180Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4181
4182- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
4183
4184Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
4185
4186- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
4187
4188Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4189
4190- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
4191
4192Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
4193
4194Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4195the corresponding single-line separators.
4196
4197+++
4198** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4199
4200The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4201`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4202Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4203that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4204default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4205default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4206default foreground is black.
4207
4208The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4209(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4210`ScrollBarBackground').
4211
4212Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4213settings for scroll bar colors.
4214
4215+++
4216** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4217display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4218
4219---
4220** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4221starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4222on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4223line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4224the original window start.
4225
4226---
4227** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4228`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4229now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4230
4231+++
4232** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4233
4234A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4235`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4236windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4237other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4238
4239The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4240fixed-width and fixed-height.
4241
4242 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4243
4244A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4245fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4246window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4247change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4248temporarily to nil, for example
4249
4250 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4251 (enlarge-window 10))
4252
79214ddf 4253Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 4254or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
4255
4256** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4257terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4258to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4259overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4260horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4261support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 4262
3787e12e 4263
79dfd2cd 4264\f
3787e12e
GM
4265* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4266
4267** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4268input.
4269
4270** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4271
4272** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4273
4274** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4275only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4276exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4277(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4278(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4279
4280** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4281been added.
4282
79dfd2cd 4283\f
3787e12e
GM
4284* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4285
4286** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4287
79dfd2cd 4288\f
3787e12e
GM
4289* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4290
4291** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4292M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
4293\f
4294* Changes in Emacs 20.4
4295
4296** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4297
4298You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4299Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4300`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4301
4302If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4303is the one that is used.
4304
4305** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4306the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4307Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4308separate from the command's regular output.
4309Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4310says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4311In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4312the buffer name.
4313
4314When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4315output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4316it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4317cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4318
4319** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4320the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4321is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4322created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4323
4324** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4325example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4326match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4327quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4328
4329** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4330now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4331if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4332they never ignore case.
4333
4334** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4335under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4336applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4337of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4338just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4339convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4340part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4341
4342If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4343the same format that was used in the file before.
4344
4345You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4346`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4347
4348** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4349renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4350This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4351
4352** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4353The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4354buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4355your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4356is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4357end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4358Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4359
4360The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4361eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4362control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4363format. You can now customize these variables.
4364
4365** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4366filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4367filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4368enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4369
4370** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4371in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4372windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4373
4374** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4375dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4376doesn't have any effect.
4377
4378** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4379not one per buffer.
4380
4381** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4382use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4383 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4384
4385** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4386To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4387`auto-show-mode' command.
4388
4389** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4390avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4391versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4392choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4393occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4394
4395** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4396cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4397
4398** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4399character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4400feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4401
4402** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4403the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4404interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4405and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4406
4407** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4408
4409The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4410that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4411one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4412codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4413set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4414
4415Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4416from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4417
4418IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4419equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4420a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4421`?' on other systems.
4422
4423IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4424feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4425Unix.
4426
4427Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4428current codepage when it starts.
4429
4430** Mail changes
4431
4432*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4433`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4434appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4435non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4436MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4437headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4438latin-1:
4439
4440 MIME-version: 1.0
4441 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4442 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4443
4444*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4445default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4446default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4447sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4448buffer-file-coding-system.
4449
4450You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4451sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4452mail.
4453
4454*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4455if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4456Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4457list of possible coding systems.
4458
4459** CC Mode changes
4460
4461*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4462modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4463longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4464docstring for details.
4465
4466*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4467symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4468found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4469prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4470lineup functions use this feature currently.
4471
4472*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4473"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4474
4475*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4476"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4477
4478*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4479from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4480symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4481c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4482anonymous classes.
4483
4484*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4485syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4486
4487*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4488inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4489support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4490function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4491
4492*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4493(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4494brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4495c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4496(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4497
4498*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4499
4500*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4501
4502*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4503for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4504
4505*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4506
4507*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4508associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4509This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4510circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4511class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4512
4513** Gnus changes.
4514
4515*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4516added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4517Gnus manual for the full story.
4518
4519*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4520before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4521group, which is created automatically.
4522
4523*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4524values.
4525
4526*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4527
4528*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4529outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4530
4531*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4532`C-u C-c C-c'.
4533
4534*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4535
4536*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4537re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4538
4539*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4540
4541*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4542Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4543
4544*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4545`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4546
4547*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4548control over simplification.
4549
4550*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4551
4552*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4553limit.
4554
4555*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4556
4557*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4558
4559*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4560If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4561rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4562
4563*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4564`a' forces normal posting method.
4565
4566*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4567-- `W d'.
4568
4569*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4570to a non-nil value.
4571
4572*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4573where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4574
4575*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4576has been added.
4577
4578*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4579
4580*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4581
4582*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4583`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4584
4585*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4586`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4587
4588*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4589
4590*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4591been added.
4592
4593*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4594`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4595
4596*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4597updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4598
4599*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4600
4601*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4602
4603*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4604
4605** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4606
4607*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4608options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4609nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4610
4611*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4612TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4613of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4614TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4615can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4616
4617*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4618All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4619but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4620the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4621
4622*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4623the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4624buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4625mismatch.
4626
4627** Changes to RefTeX mode
4628
4629*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4630file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4631
4632*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4633lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4634characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4635removed from the label.
4636
4637*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4638a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4639
4640*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4641customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4642
4643*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4644`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4645expressions.
4646
4647*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4648
4649** New/deleted modes and packages
4650
4651*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4652SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4653
4654*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4655editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4656SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4657
4658*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4659changes with a special face.
4660
4661*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4662this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4663Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4664\f
4665* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4666
4667** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4668This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4669conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4670and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4671check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4672
4673The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4674Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4675distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4676
4677** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4678MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4679controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4680directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4681Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4682on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4683string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4684program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4685printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4686
4687** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4688output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4689available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4690input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4691temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4692program.
4693
4694An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4695and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4696programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4697automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4698as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4699ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4700
4701** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4702a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4703MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4704was not documented clearly before.
4705
4706** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4707This includes Tetris and Snake.
4708\f
4709* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4710
4711** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4712return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4713They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4714meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4715
4716** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4717WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4718and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4719
4720** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4721
4722*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4723It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4724
4725*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4726the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4727integers.
4728
4729** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4730files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4731arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4732file names and attributes are returned.
4733
4734** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4735sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4736accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4737It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4738returns the result.
4739
4740** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4741to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4742
4743** New functions for base64 conversion:
4744
4745The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4746into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4747performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4748optionally.
4749
4750Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4751job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4752
4753**
4754The new function process-running-child-p
4755will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4756terminal to its own child process.
4757
4758** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4759when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4760to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4761itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4762
4763** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4764be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4765
4766** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4767:included is an alias for :visible.
4768
4769easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4770easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4771to move or copy menu entries.
4772
4773** Multibyte editing changes
4774
4775*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4776an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4777make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4778work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4779char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4780 (setq char (sref str idx)
4781 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4782The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4783
4784If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4785(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4786 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4787
4788*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4789region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4790deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4791
4792 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4793
4794This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4795across the boundary.
4796
4797*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4798`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4799 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4800 contains 8-bit characters.
4801 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4802 contains invalid characters.
4803
4804*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4805text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4806preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4807text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4808way.
4809
4810*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4811If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4812end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4813prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4814
4815*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4816compose Thai characters in a string.
4817
4818** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4819argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4820for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4821menus should always use the third argument.
4822
4823** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4824read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4825arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4826input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4827
4828** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4829of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4830programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4831inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4832
4833** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4834the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4835returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4836echo area contents.
4837
4838 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4839
4840** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4841NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4842requested feature cannot be loaded.
4843
4844** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4845foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4846means to clear out that attribute.
4847
4848** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4849gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4850
4851** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4852read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4853unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4854end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4855
4856** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4857the gap of the current buffer.
4858
4859** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4860to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4861current buffer.
4862
4863** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4864facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4865These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4866it back in after any modifications have been made.
4867\f
4868* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4869
4870** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4871the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4872/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4873directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4874subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4875
4876Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4877names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4878Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4879which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4880these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4881
4882Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4883starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4884time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4885
4886This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4887Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4888to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4889subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4890`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4891results.
4892
4893** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4894GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4895that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4896fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4897\f
4898* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4899
4900** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4901including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4902it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4903perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4904
4905** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4906specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4907region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4908further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4909command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4910within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4911are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4912region.
4913
4914In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4915selective undo.
4916
4917** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4918unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4919buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4920effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4921Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4922
4923The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4924though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4925-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4926load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4927
4928** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4929no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4930enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4931something that most users not do.
4932
4933** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4934operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4935The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4936applications.
4937
4938C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4939pasting operations.
4940
4941** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4942setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4943like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4944printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4945`ps-printer-name'.
4946
4947** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4948minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4949any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4950except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4951incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4952hits a new word.
4953
4954Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4955Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4956to be confused by TeX commands.
4957
4958You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4959correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4960clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4961of various alternative replacements and actions.
4962
4963Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4964the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4965corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4966alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4967flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4968
4969Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4970flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4971
4972** Changes in input method usage.
4973
4974Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4975the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4976respectively.
4977
4978You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4979
4980If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4981of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4982
4983The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4984that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4985
4986 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4987
4988 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4989
4990 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4991 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4992
4993 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4994 given in the following case:
4995 o When you are using a complex input method.
4996 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4997
4998If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4999input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
5000and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
5001setting it to t is helpful.
5002
5003The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
5004
5005In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
5006keys:
5007 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
5008 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
5009 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
5010These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
5011environment.
5012
5013** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
5014names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
5015minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
5016get
5017
5018 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
5019
5020which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
5021
5022Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
5023Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
5024
5025** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
5026at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
5027its owner and group.
5028
5029** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
5030Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
5031
5032** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
5033contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
5034
5035** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
5036which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
5037in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
5038by the left edge of the rectangle.
5039
5040** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
5041increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
5042C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
5043for writing keyboard macros.
5044
5045** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
5046files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
5047frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
5048the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
5049additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
5050info.
5051
5052** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
5053
5054** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
5055query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
5056contents only.
5057
5058** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
5059confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
5060the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
5061says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
5062
5063** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
5064non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
5065literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
5066
5067** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
5068now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
5069Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
5070inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
5071
5072** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
5073failure if the command produces no output.
5074
5075** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
5076manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
5077the mouse.
5078
5079** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
5080mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
5081function and variable names.
5082
5083** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
5084reading specific files. This has higher priority than
5085file-coding-system-alist.
5086
5087** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
5088t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
5089converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
5090the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
5091according to the current fontset.
5092
5093** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
5094
5095The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
5096that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
5097nonascii-insert-offset.
5098
5099For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
5100enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
5101nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
5102characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
5103
5104** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
5105an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
5106
5107** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
5108letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
5109
5110** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
5111are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
5112command keys.
5113
5114** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
5115user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
5116
5117Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
5118user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
5119all variables that have documentation.
5120
5121** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
5122shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
5123that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
5124minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
5125it should show; the default is 20.
5126
5127Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
5128the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
5129of your input.
5130
5131** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
5132all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
5133recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
5134argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
5135the customizable options which were changed since that version.
5136Newly added options are included as well.
5137
5138If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
5139then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
5140for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
5141
5142This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
5143Customize menu.
5144
5145** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
5146the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
5147
5148** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
5149buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
5150invoked.
5151
5152** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
5153that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
5154The default is 1.
5155
5156** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
5157syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
5158new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
5159(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
5160sensibly.
5161
5162** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
5163
5164** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
5165value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
5166two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
5167
5168** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
5169reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
5170for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
5171every night.
5172
5173** Desktop changes
5174
5175*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
5176the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
5177
5178*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
5179and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
5180
5181** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
5182read and post multi-lingual articles.
5183
5184** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
5185doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
5186be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
5187outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
5188the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
5189made invisible again.
5190
5191** Mail reading and sending changes
5192
5193*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
5194the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5195changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5196toggle.
5197
5198*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5199now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5200summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5201the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5202rmail-default-body-file.
5203
5204*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5205longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5206handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5207
5208*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5209it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5210is evaluated to insert the signature.
5211
5212*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5213outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5214handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5215putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5216transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5217especially interested in trying feedmail.
5218
5219feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5220feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5221provided by feedmail are:
5222
5223**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5224stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5225there is also a queue for draft messages
5226
5227**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5228be prompted for confirmation
5229
5230**** does smart filling of address headers
5231
5232**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5233the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5234can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5235
5236**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5237the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5238/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5239function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5240
5241** Dired changes
5242
5243*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5244files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5245
5246*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5247run Dired on the directory name at point.
5248
5249*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5250files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5251for a specified regexp.
5252
5253** VC Changes
5254
5255*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5256conveniently.
5257
5258*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5259faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5260Dired.
5261
5262VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5263directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5264listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5265currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5266
5267You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5268then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5269vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5270control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5271on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5272
5273All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5274is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5275`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5276the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5277`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5278
5279The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5280toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5281VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5282`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5283
5284Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5285ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5286command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5287
5288*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5289file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5290session to resolve them.
5291
5292Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5293resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5294contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5295uses as well).
5296
5297*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5298command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5299you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5300either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5301branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5302If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5303using ediff.
5304
5305** Changes in Font Lock
5306
5307*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5308are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5309use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5310unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5311compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5312
5313** Frame name display changes
5314
5315*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5316frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5317raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5318when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5319
5320*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5321frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5322menu.
5323
5324** Comint (subshell) changes
5325
5326*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5327subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5328with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5329
5330*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5331
5332C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5333that is, the line after the last line you got.
5334You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5335
5336C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5337send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5338the following line.
5339
5340C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5341which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5342previously sent input.
5343
5344C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5345it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5346as the search string.
5347
5348*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5349automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5350
5351** C mode changes
5352
5353*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5354and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5355assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5356definition.
5357
5358*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5359(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5360Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5361style is still the default however.
5362
5363*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5364
5365*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5366are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5367them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5368
5369*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5370and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5371
5372*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5373namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5374
5375*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5376makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5377
5378*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5379c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5380
5381*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5382should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5383package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5384variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5385
5386** Changes to hippie-expand.
5387
5388*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5389non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5390which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5391
5392*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5393non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5394expanding dynamically.
5395
5396*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5397non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5398
5399*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5400non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5401this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5402expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5403
5404*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5405
5406** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5407
5408*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5409bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5410automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5411bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5412against the first word in the title.
5413
5414*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5415capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5416bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5417lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5418lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5419bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5420
5421*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5422generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5423replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5424bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5425
5426** Changes in vcursor.el.
5427
5428*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5429and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5430variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5431entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5432`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5433in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5434
5435*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5436Editing group once the package is loaded.
5437
5438*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5439generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5440vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5441
5442*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5443vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5444
5445** Ispell changes.
5446
5447*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5448buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5449are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5450
5451*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5452A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5453and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5454defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5455include:
5456
5457 o URLs are automatically skipped
5458 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5459
5460*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5461
5462** Changes to RefTeX mode
5463
5464RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5465large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5466re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5467section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5468
5469*** New recursive parser.
5470
5471The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5472entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5473recursive parser scans the individual files.
5474
5475*** Parsing only part of a document.
5476
5477Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5478partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5479the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5480
5481 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5482
5483*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5484
5485This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5486
5487 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5488
5489*** Using multiple selection buffers
5490
5491If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5492for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5493
5494 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5495
5496*** References to external documents.
5497
5498The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5499documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5500documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5501macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5502RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5503the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5504The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5505
5506*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5507
5508The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5509and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5510
5511Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5512the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5513
5514*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5515
5516The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5517buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5518
5519*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5520
5521The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5522contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5523`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5524have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5525enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5526at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5527more.
5528
5529*** Support for the varioref package
5530
5531The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5532
5533*** New hooks
5534
5535Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5536and citations are created. These hooks are
5537`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5538`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5539
5540*** Citations outside LaTeX
5541
5542The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5543a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5544
5545*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5546
5547The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5548fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5549fontified, use
5550
5551 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5552
5553** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5554With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5555the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5556directories that contain the same file name.
5557
5558Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5559Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5560file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5561Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5562have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5563names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5564directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5565directory.
5566
5567** New modes and packages
5568
5569*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5570It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5571it, but some do not.
5572
5573*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5574code.
5575
5576*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5577current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5578around in a buffer.
5579
5580Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5581
5582*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5583uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5584be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5585established system of notation similar to Chess.
5586
5587*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5588documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5589guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5590
5591*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5592available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5593system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5594simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5595functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5596the like.
5597
5598*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5599identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5600
5601*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5602within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5603used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5604the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5605
5606*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5607
5608 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5609 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5610 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5611 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5612 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5613 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5614 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5615 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5616 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5617 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5618 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5619
5620 Platform-specific modes:
5621
5622 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5623 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5624 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5625 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5626 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5627 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5628 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5629 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5630 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5631\f
5632* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5633
5634** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5635use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5636That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5637Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5638
5639Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5640you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5641consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5642
5643** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5644and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5645specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5646searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5647
5648** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5649multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5650character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5651environment.
5652
5653** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5654take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5655string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5656current input method for reading this one event.
5657
5658** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5659now control whether to output certain characters as
5660backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5661non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5662characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5663in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5664\f
5665* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5666
5667** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5668of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5669
5670** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5671in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5672always increases point by 1.
5673
5674The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5675considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5676
5677See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5678
5679** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5680Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5681default value changed. For example,
5682
5683 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5684 :type 'integer
5685 :group 'foo
5686 :version "20.3")
5687
5688 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5689 :version "20.3")
5690
5691If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5692default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5693is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5694`:version' in the top level group.
5695
5696This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5697
5698** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5699starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5700
5701However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5702symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5703support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5704to themselves.
5705
5706If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5707this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5708values whatever.
5709
5710** There is a new debugger command, R.
5711It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5712in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5713
5714** Frame-local variables.
5715
5716You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5717the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5718local bindings for that variable.
5719
5720These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5721frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5722modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5723parameter name.
5724
5725Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5726Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5727active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5728that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5729
5730It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5731clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5732very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5733through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5734
5735** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5736"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5737evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5738makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5739See the documentation in sregex.el.
5740
5741** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5742is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5743parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5744The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5745
5746** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5747If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5748
5749** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5750known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5751define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5752
5753** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5754when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5755it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5756history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5757
5758The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5759return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5760empty input.
5761
5762** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5763for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5764`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5765Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5766`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5767
5768** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5769echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5770a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5771default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5772
5773** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5774specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5775function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5776place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5777non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5778
5779** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5780If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5781up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5782end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5783
5784** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5785which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5786If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5787
5788** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5789holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5790was directed to display this buffer.
5791
5792** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5793with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5794describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5795other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5796set-window-configuration.
5797
5798** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5799window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5800positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5801windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5802
5803** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5804override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5805look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5806
5807If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5808non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5809map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5810
5811minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5812and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5813
5814** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5815except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5816
5817** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5818USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5819floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5820
5821** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5822to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5823in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5824it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5825
5826** Menu changes
5827
5828*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5829keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5830better supported.
5831
5832The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5833a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5834you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5835can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5836then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5837
5838*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5839
5840In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5841 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5842defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5843starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5844
5845The format is:
5846 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5847 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5848where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5849string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5850The supported properties include
5851
5852:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5853 item is enabled.
5854:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5855 item should appear in the menu.
5856:filter FILTER-FN
5857 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5858 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5859 It should return a binding to use instead.
5860:keys DESCRIPTION
5861 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5862 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5863 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5864:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5865 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5866 keyboard binding.
5867:key-sequence nil
5868 This means that the command normally has no
5869 keyboard equivalent.
5870:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5871:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5872 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5873 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5874 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5875
5876Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5877Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5878
5879(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5880
5881** New event types
5882
5883*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5884mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5885corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5886which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5887
5888 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5889
5890where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5891same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5892indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5893negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5894the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5895forward, away from the user.
5896
5897As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5898
5899*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5900files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5901and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5902filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5903loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5904
5905 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5906
5907where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5908same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5909that were dragged and dropped.
5910
5911As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5912
5913** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5914
5915*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5916any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5917to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5918
5919*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5920can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5921that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5922
5923*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5924in Emacs 19 and before.
5925
5926The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5927The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5928
5929*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5930buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5931unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5932representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5933
5934This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5935as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5936viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5937one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5938will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5939
5940This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5941representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5942(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5943consistent with the new representation.
5944
5945*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5946representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5947about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5948however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5949
5950The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5951nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5952using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5953
5954*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5955representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5956representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5957
5958The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5959loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5960is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5961
5962*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5963which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5964
5965*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5966which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5967
5968*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5969portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5970so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5971You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5972
5973*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5974it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5975
5976*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5977convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5978buffer or string being searched.
5979
5980One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5981[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5982searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5983searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5984obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5985you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5986expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5987
5988*** Structure of coding system changed.
5989
5990All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5991by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5992which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5993as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5994vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5995your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5996define-coding-system-alias.
5997
5998The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5999the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
6000access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
6001pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
6002character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
6003safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
6004'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
6005`iso-8859-1'.
6006
6007Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
6008The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
6009coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
6010(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
6011
6012Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
6013also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
6014are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
6015the other character sets and read it back correctly.
6016
6017*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
6018proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
6019This function requires a user interaction.
6020
6021*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
6022find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
6023select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
6024systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
6025a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
6026select-safe-coding-system.
6027
6028*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
6029decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
6030last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
6031was done.
6032
6033*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
6034used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
6035coding systems used by some specific language environment.
6036
6037*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
6038return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
6039characters are found, they now return a list of single element
6040`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
6041
6042*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
6043coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
6044coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
6045converted.
6046
6047*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
6048coding system for communicating with other X clients.
6049
6050*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
6051character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
6052character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
6053each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
6054either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
6055range of characters.
6056
6057*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
6058Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
6059
6060*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
6061in the current buffer at position POS.
6062
6063*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
6064input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
6065function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
6066character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
6067event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
6068binding input-method-function to nil.
6069
6070The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
6071method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
6072input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
6073the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
6074not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
6075
6076The input method function is not called when reading the second and
6077subsequent events of a key sequence.
6078
6079*** You can customize any language environment by using
6080set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
6081
6082The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
6083customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
6084instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
6085environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
6086exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
6087\f
6088* Changes in Emacs 20.1
6089
6090** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
6091options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
6092at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
6093tree structure.
6094
6095M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
6096user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
6097
6098With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
6099session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
6100in your .emacs file.)
6101
6102** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
6103You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
6104
6105** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
6106This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
6107
6108** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
6109immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
6110kills the region.
6111
6112The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
6113delete the character before point, as usual.
6114
6115** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
6116on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
6117by setting search-highlight to nil.)
6118
6119** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
6120insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
6121the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
6122onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
6123history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
6124past.)
6125
6126** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
6127This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
6128in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
6129TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
6130makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
6131
6132As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
6133and is an alias for it.
6134
6135If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
6136use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
6137
6138** Scrolling changes
6139
6140*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
6141position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
6142
6143In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
6144on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
6145where it started.
6146
6147*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
6148move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
6149screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
6150does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
6151
6152*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
6153top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
6154comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
6155recenters the window.
6156
6157** International character set support (MULE)
6158
6159Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
6160including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
6161Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
6162Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
6163features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
6164MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
6165
6166Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
6167coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
6168character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
6169variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
6170into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
6171
6172Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
6173generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
6174supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
6175language, to make it possible to type them.
6176
6177The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
6178character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
6179
6180The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
6181to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
6182
6183You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
6184
6185 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
6186
6187Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
6188characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
6189argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
6190already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
6191characters for their work until they want to change.
6192
6193*** Input methods
6194
6195An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6196specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6197has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6198the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6199support several input methods.
6200
6201The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6202another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6203work.
6204
6205A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6206characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6207composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6208consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6209sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6210letter.
6211
6212The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6213by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6214First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6215marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6216mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6217
6218None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6219they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6220phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6221converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6222
6223Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6224word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6225typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6226the first guess is wrong.
6227
6228*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6229turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6230
6231If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6232byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6233they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6234the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6235
6236However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6237use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6238includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6239translate automatically to and from either one.
6240
6241*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6242
6243Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6244file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6245sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6246what you want.
6247
6248If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6249example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6250system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6251multibyte characters in that buffer.
6252
6253If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6254character conversion as well.
6255
6256*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6257
6258A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6259Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6260requires using many fonts.
6261
6262Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6263collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6264
6265A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6266the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6267have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6268you would use a font.
6269
6270If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6271specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6272display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6273
6274The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6275(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6276characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6277or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6278and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6279
6280*** Defining fontsets.
6281
6282Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6283chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6284with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6285
6286Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6287of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6288`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6289standard fontset are created automatically.
6290
6291If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6292argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6293FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6294with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6295name is `fontset-startup'.
6296
6297Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6298The resource value should have this form:
6299 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6300FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6301 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6302 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6303 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6304The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6305of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6306CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
6307FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6308
6309Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6310last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6311You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6312
6313For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6314font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6315following resource,
6316 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6317the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6318 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6319Here is the substitution rule:
6320 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6321 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6322 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6323 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6324 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6325
6326The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6327fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6328that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6329
6330With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6331like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6332name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6333fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6334fontsets.
6335
6336*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6337defaults for a particular choice of language.
6338
6339Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6340method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6341visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6342already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6343language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6344system for new files that you create.
6345
6346It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6347set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6348whole Emacs session.
6349
6350For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6351chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6352with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6353
6354*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6355specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6356specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6357the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6358coding systems that Emacs supports.
6359
6360*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6361lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6362This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6363After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6364is used for *the immediately following command*.
6365
6366So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6367write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6368
6369If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6370then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6371
6372For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6373visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6374
6375*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6376construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6377to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6378specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6379of the file.
6380
6381*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6382the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6383code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6384translated into that character code.
6385
6386This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6387various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6388
6389By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6390
6391*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6392the coding system for keyboard input.
6393
6394Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6395with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6396some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6397
6398By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6399
6400Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6401input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6402translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6403to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6404designed to work with terminals.
6405
6406*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6407specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6408This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6409has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6410translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6411in the corresponding buffer.
6412
6413By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6414
6415*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6416to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6417It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6418
6419*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6420an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6421command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6422want to use.
6423
6424C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6425method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6426
6427*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6428layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6429remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6430which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6431
6432*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6433the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6434related information.
6435
6436*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6437HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6438scripts.
6439
6440*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6441information about the support for a particular language.
6442You specify the language as an argument.
6443
6444*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6445the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6446first dash.
6447
6448A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6449(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6450whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
64511 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6452
6453 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6454 B big5 (Chinese)
6455 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6456 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6457 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6458 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6459 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6460 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6461 K euc-korea (Korean)
6462 R koi8 (Russian)
6463 Q tibetan
6464 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6465 T lao
6466 T tis620 (Thai)
6467 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6468 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6469 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6470 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6471 z hz (Chinese)
6472
6473When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6474two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6475coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6476keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6477
6478*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6479conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6480
6481When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6482into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6483rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6484Rmail files themselves.
6485
6486*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6487conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6488
6489Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6490for sending mail:
6491
6492- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6493- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6494- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6495 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6496- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6497
6498*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6499to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6500Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6501translations.
6502
6503** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6504of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6505insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6506without any conversion.
6507
6508** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6509You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6510RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6511any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6512
6513** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6514functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6515
6516Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6517Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6518
6519Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6520mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6521
6522** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6523complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6524in the buffer before point.
6525
6526With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6527symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6528you are using.
6529
6530With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6531just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6532
6533** File locking works with NFS now.
6534
6535The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6536in the same directory as FILENAME.
6537
6538This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6539works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6540can become a bottleneck.
6541
6542The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6543does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6544create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6545file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6546rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6547so useful that the change is worth while.
6548
6549When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6550are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6551collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6552tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6553
6554** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6555it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6556show-paren-mode.
6557
6558** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6559selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6560delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6561
6562** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6563within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6564complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6565
6566** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6567it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6568set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6569
6570** Changes in View mode.
6571
6572*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6573Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6574
6575*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6576view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6577
6578*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6579previous state.
6580
6581*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6582scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6583
6584*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6585non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6586not just the selected window.
6587
6588*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6589read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6590turns View mode on or off.
6591
6592*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6593how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6594delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6595
6596** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6597now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6598
6599** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6600has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6601presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6602which version to compare with.
6603
6604** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6605blocks if a match is inside the block.
6606
6607The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6608is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6609isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6610shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6611
6612By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6613of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6614blocks, all of them or none.
6615
6616** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6617current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6618confirmation first.
6619
6620** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6621now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6622However, the mode will not be changed if
6623(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6624(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6625 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6626(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6627
6628This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6629
6630However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6631these commands do not change the major mode.
6632
6633** M-x occur changes.
6634
6635*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6636it performs a case-sensitive search.
6637
6638*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6639if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6640using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6641
6642** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6643in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6644window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6645that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6646buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6647
6648** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6649after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6650appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6651come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6652
6653** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6654selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6655buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6656
6657** Outline mode changes.
6658
6659*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6660
6661*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6662
6663** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6664you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6665Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6666was already active.
6667
6668The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6669unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6670get confused by it.
6671
6672If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6673set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6674
6675** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6676
6677*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6678conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6679character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6680including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6681
6682The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6683mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6684copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6685
6686*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6687are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6688values.
6689
6690`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6691case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6692`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6693case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6694
6695** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6696certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6697can be. The default value is 30.
6698
6699** Changes in Mail mode.
6700
6701*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6702Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6703composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6704`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6705`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6706behavior.
6707
6708C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6709compose-mail-other-frame.
6710
6711*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6712the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6713replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6714buffer that shows the original message.
6715
6716*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6717with separator lines around the contents.
6718
6719*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6720in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6721definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6722need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6723
6724*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6725
6726**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6727for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6728controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6729Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6730
6731**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6732to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6733/etc/passwd.
6734
6735**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6736to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6737/etc/passwd.
6738
6739** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6740special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6741directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6742reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6743
6744Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6745when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6746be taken to be magic.
6747
6748** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6749files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6750available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6751
6752M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6753(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6754
6755** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6756suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6757
6758In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6759
6760new key dired.el binding old key
6761------- ---------------- -------
6762 * c dired-change-marks c
6763 * m dired-mark m
6764 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6765 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6766 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6767 * u dired-unmark u
6768 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6769 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6770 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6771 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6772 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6773 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6774
6775** Rmail changes.
6776
6777*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6778saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6779chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6780each time you run it.
6781
6782*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6783whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6784
6785*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6786messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6787means to move in the opposite direction.
6788
6789*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6790you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6791
6792*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6793just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6794It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6795can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6796for output.
6797
6798** Gnus changes.
6799
6800*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6801
6802*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6803Gnus.
6804
6805*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6806`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6807
6808*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6809article mode line.
6810
6811*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6812
6813*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6814
6815(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6816
6817*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6818are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6819`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6820
6821*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6822
6823*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6824
6825*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6826See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6827
6828*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6829Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6830used to pick articles.
6831
6832*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6833another have been added.
6834
6835 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6836
6837*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6838generating lines in buffers.
6839
6840*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6841`M-C-_'.
6842
6843*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6844
6845*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6846
6847 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6848
6849*** Scores can be decayed.
6850
6851 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6852
6853*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6854Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6855
6856*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6857the native server.
6858
6859 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6860
6861*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6862(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6863
6864*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6865
6866*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6867even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6868
6869*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6870(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6871
6872 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6873 a group.
6874
6875*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6876sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6877
6878 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6879
6880*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6881
6882 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6883
6884*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6885
6886 Use the `Y c' command.
6887
6888*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6889
6890*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6891
6892 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6893
6894*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6895from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6896
6897 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6898
6899*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6900
6901*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6902the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6903
6904 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6905
6906Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6907and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6908from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6909hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6910this issue.)
6911
6912Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6913automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6914particular news group. This can be done by:
6915
6916 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6917
6918Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6919of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6920"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6921system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6922for reading and posting).
6923
6924CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6925 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6926Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6927newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6928there.
6929
6930Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6931default. Here are some of these default settings:
6932
6933 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6934 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6935 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6936 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6937 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6938
6939When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6940the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6941
6942** CC mode changes.
6943
6944*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6945code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6946values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6947this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6948Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6949loaded.
6950
6951If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6952Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6953style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6954share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6955c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6956must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6957
6958*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6959of the current buffer.
6960
6961*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6962it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6963of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6964
6965*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6966style that the Python developers like.
6967
6968*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6969This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6970just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6971
6972** VC Changes [new]
6973
6974** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6975name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6976directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6977
6978This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6979master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6980developers.
6981
6982You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6983RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6984
6985*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6986other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6987writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6988calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6989
6990*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6991version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6992
6993** Calendar changes.
6994
6995A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6996of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6997for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6998
6999** ps-print changes
7000
7001There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
7002
7003*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
7004
7005The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
7006formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
7007`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
7008`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
7009It defaults to `letter'.
7010If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
7011
7012The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
7013of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
7014non-nil means "landscape" mode.
7015
7016The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
7017It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
7018It defaults to 1.
7019
7020*** Horizontal layout
7021
7022The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
7023`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
7024All are measured in points.
7025
7026*** Vertical layout
7027
7028The vertical layout is determined by the variables
7029`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
7030All are measured in points.
7031
7032*** Headers
7033
7034If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
7035`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
7036margin above the text.
7037
7038If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
7039framing box is printed around the header.
7040
7041The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
7042`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
7043
7044The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
7045`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
7046`ps-header-font-size'.
7047
7048*** Font managing
7049
7050The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
7051used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
7052`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
7053elements to this alist.
7054
7055The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
7056for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
7057
7058** hideshow changes.
7059
7060*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
7061C++, ; for lisp).
7062
7063*** Support for java-mode added.
7064
7065*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
7066in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
7067
7068*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
7069the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
7070way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
7071
7072*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
7073robust and a lot faster.
7074
7075*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
7076
7077*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
7078to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
7079documentation for more details.
7080
7081** Changes in Enriched mode.
7082
7083*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
7084filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
7085of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
7086use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
7087the next time unless the fill-column is different.
7088
7089*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
7090distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
7091as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
7092as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
7093
7094** Font Lock mode
7095
7096*** Custom support
7097
7098The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
7099font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
7100faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
7101group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
7102your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
7103consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
7104
7105You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
7106
7107*** Maximum decoration
7108
7109Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
7110default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
7111of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
7112supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
7113to get the old behavior.
7114
7115*** New support
7116
7117Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
7118
7119Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
7120support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
7121
7122*** Configurable support
7123
7124Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
7125additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
7126c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
7127java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
7128list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
7129of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
7130convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
7131
7132Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
7133way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
7134it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
7135
7136*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
7137
7138You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
7139highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
7140for any mode.
7141
7142For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
7143
7144 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
7145
7146in your ~/.emacs.
7147
7148*** New faces
7149
7150Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
7151font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
7152distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
7153to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
7154
7155*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
7156
7157The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
7158cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
7159same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
7160
7161*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
7162
7163The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
7164according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
7165the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
7166non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
7167refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
7168the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
7169Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
7170
7171This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
7172For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
7173this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
7174refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
7175containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
7176the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
7177
7178As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
7179
7180Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
7181Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
7182Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
7183new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
7184
7185If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
7186settings.
7187
7188** Ada mode changes.
7189
7190*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
7191If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
7192procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
7193you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
7194stubs.
7195
7196*** There are two new commands:
7197 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
7198 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
7199
7200The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
7201`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
7202`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
7203
7204*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
7205is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
7206Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
7207
7208*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
7209formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
7210places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
7211space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
7212
7213** Scheme mode changes.
7214
7215*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
7216mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
7217for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
7218with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
7219have any effect.
7220
7221If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
7222still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
7223scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
7224variables as buffer-local variables.
7225
7226*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
7227Use M-x dsssl-mode.
7228
7229** Changes to the emacsclient program
7230
7231*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
7232USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
7233associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
7234can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
7235
7236*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
7237it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
7238buffer in Emacs.
7239
7240*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
7241use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
7242ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
7243option takes precedence.
7244
7245** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
7246constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
7247(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
7248
7249** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
7250which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
7251the current defun.
7252
7253** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
7254following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
7255
7256** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
7257and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
7258necessary).
7259
7260** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
7261if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7262these register values no longer become completely useless.
7263If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7264asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7265it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7266
7267** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7268example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7269be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7270you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7271
7272You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7273variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7274file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7275revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7276only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7277
7278** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7279since it applies only to the current frame.
7280
7281** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7282file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7283and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7284
7285This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7286multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7287variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7288tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7289instead of just the file you are editing.
7290
7291** RefTeX mode
7292
7293RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7294and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7295different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7296multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7297turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7298
7299C-c ( reftex-label
7300 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7301 knows which kind of label is needed.
7302
7303C-c ) reftex-reference
7304 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7305 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7306
7307C-c [ reftex-citation
7308 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7309 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7310
7311C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7312 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7313
7314C-c = reftex-toc
7315 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7316 can quickly jump to every section.
7317
7318Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7319commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7320Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7321reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7322C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7323
7324** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7325
7326*** Info documentation is now available.
7327
7328*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7329both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7330
7331*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7332bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7333
7334*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7335(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7336
7337*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7338entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7339appropriate functions.
7340
7341*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7342entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7343
7344*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7345been cleaned.
7346
7347*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7348bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7349
7350*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7351shall be delimited.
7352
7353*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7354bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7355bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7356
7357*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7358field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7359prefixed with `ALT'.
7360
7361*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7362bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7363formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7364documentation).
7365
7366*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7367documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7368for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7369
7370*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7371comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7372
7373*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7374alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7375signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7376
7377*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7378
7379*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7380
7381*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7382from alien sources.
7383
7384*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7385to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7386crossref entries.
7387
7388*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7389region.
7390
7391*** Added support for imenu.
7392
7393*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7394of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7395`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7396`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7397
7398*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7399from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7400
7401** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7402
7403** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7404
7405** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7406functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7407Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7408as an argument.
7409
7410When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7411and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7412
7413** browse-url changes
7414
7415*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7416Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7417(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7418non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7419customization variables.
7420
7421*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7422
7423*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7424lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7425(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7426
7427** Changes in Ediff
7428
7429*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7430pops up the Info file for this command.
7431
7432*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7433the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7434merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7435directories).
7436
7437*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7438and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7439files in the same directory.
7440
7441*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7442The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7443related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7444
7445** Changes in Viper
7446
7447*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7448*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7449 instead of vip-.
7450*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7451*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7452Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7453*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7454*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7455*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7456color when Viper is in insert state.
7457*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7458Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7459viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7460
7461** Etags changes.
7462
7463*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7464default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7465Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7466variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7467not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7468
7469*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7470
7471*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7472constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7473
7474*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7475recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7476In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7477
7478*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7479C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7480recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7481methods and protocols.
7482
7483*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7484.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7485column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7486paragraph name.
7487
7488*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7489an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7490at least M times and as many as N times.
7491
7492** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7493in files has changed slightly.
7494
7495With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7496time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7497This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7498with old time-stamp-format values.
7499
7500In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7501(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7502This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7503reasons.
7504
7505In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7506natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7507fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7508(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7509time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7510specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7511
7512Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7513case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7514truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7515
7516The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7517being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7518future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7519recommended now will continue to work then.
7520
7521See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7522details.
7523
7524** There are some additional major modes:
7525
7526dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7527m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7528meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7529
7530** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7531copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7532into Emacs.
7533
7534** New Lisp packages include:
7535
7536*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7537
7538*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7539be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7540
7541*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7542
7543*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7544in shell buffers.
7545
7546*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7547See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7548and `elint-defun'.
7549
7550*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7551meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7552ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7553strings or comments.
7554
7555These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7556abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7557you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7558insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7559at these points.
7560
7561*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7562can visit them by short forms of their names.
7563
7564*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7565Emacs Lisp function at point.
7566
7567*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7568
7569*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7570switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7571
7572*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7573
7574*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7575
7576*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7577
7578*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7579from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7580
7581*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7582You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7583inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7584original place after inserting the copy.
7585
7586*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7587on the buffer.
7588
7589You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7590velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7591(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7592
7593Enable mouse-drag with:
7594 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7595-or-
7596 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7597
7598*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7599mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7600
7601*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7602It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7603
7604*** ogonek
7605
7606The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7607Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7608platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7609TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7610ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7611prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7612instance) and vice versa.
7613
7614To use this package load it using
7615 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7616Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7617 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7618 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7619The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7620ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7621
7622*** Interface to ph.
7623
7624Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7625
7626The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7627services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7628these servers.
7629
7630*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7631
7632*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7633You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7634while the real cursor does not move.
7635
7636*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7637for visiting your favorite web sites.
7638
7639*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7640so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7641
7642** movemail change
7643
7644Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7645mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7646supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7647user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7648
7649This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7650\f
7651* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7652
7653** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7654
7655Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7656end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7657Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7658file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7659file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7660
7661To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7662C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7663coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7664specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7665LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7666save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7667\f
7668* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7669
7670** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7671Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7672vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7673Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7674
7675** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7676to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7677
7678In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7679don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7680"win".
7681
7682** Basic Lisp changes
7683
7684*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7685evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7686
7687*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7688be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7689or by the user.
7690
7691The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7692
7693*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7694
7695(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7696(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7697
7698*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7699usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7700its argument.
7701
7702*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7703
7704*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7705
7706*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7707
7708*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7709error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7710include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7711`format' function.
7712
7713*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7714or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7715whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7716
7717*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7718either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7719adding one of these suffixes.
7720
7721*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7722which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7723If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7724
7725We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7726because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7727
7728*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7729
7730*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7731You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7732
7733*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7734conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7735
7736 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7737
7738BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7739BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7740
7741*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7742choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7743restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7744works using `save-current-buffer'.
7745
7746*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7747write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7748of the last form.
7749
7750*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7751which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7752last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7753as the last form.
7754
7755*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7756characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7757matches.
7758
7759For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7760
7761*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7762with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7763Then it returns that string.
7764
7765For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7766
7767(with-output-to-string
7768 (princ "The buffer is ")
7769 (princ (buffer-name)))
7770
7771returns "The buffer is foo".
7772
7773** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7774is non-nil.
7775
7776These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7777buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7778characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7779
7780*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7781a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7782
7783Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7784character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7785Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7786position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7787characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7788 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7789
7790ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7791Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7792non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7793characters".
7794
7795The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7796through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7797"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7798range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7799leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7800
7801*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7802(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7803multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7804character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7805
7806This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7807always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7808
7809However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7810
7811*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7812because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7813have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7814the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7815guaranteed.
7816
7817*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7818between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7819character).
7820
7821When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7822
7823 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7824 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7825 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7826 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7827 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7828
7829*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7830
7831*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7832`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7833more than the number of characters.
7834
7835You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7836it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7837\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7838is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7839follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7840newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7841
7842*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7843and returns a string containing those characters.
7844
7845*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7846(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7847counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7848character, sref signals an error.
7849
7850*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7851in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7852string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7853
7854*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7855in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7856region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7857
7858*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7859the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7860to a vector of the characters in it.
7861
7862*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7863of a string. You call it as follows:
7864
7865 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7866
7867This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7868STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7869This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7870Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7871it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7872
7873*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7874if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7875
7876*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7877if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7878
7879*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7880to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7881not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7882which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7883
7884(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7885
7886This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7887
7888The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7889If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7890are not included in the resulting value.
7891
7892The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7893at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7894WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7895is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7896
7897If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7898place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7899character extends across that column), then the padding character
7900PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7901string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7902column START-COLUMN.
7903
7904*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7905the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7906necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7907difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7908changed text, before the change.
7909
7910*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7911sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7912one character set for each script, not for each language.
7913
7914**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7915
7916**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7917
7918**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7919set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7920
7921**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7922name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7923which identify the character within that character set.
7924
7925**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7926byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7927opposite of split-char.
7928
7929**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7930of all the characters between BEG and END.
7931
7932**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7933of all the characters in a string.
7934
7935*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7936and specifying coding systems.
7937
7938**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7939system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7940of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7941(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7942and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7943as what to do about code conversion.)
7944
7945**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7946name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7947
7948**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7949for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7950except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7951
7952Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7953which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7954to match against a file name.
7955
7956VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7957a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7958decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7959to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7960systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7961specifies the coding system for encoding.
7962
7963If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7964or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7965
7966**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7967the coding system to use for network sockets.
7968
7969Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7970which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7971either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7972service names.
7973
7974VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7975a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7976decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7977to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7978systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7979specifies the coding system for encoding.
7980
7981If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7982or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7983
7984**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7985for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7986except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7987start the subprocess.
7988
7989**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7990systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7991when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7992(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7993to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7994
7995**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7996coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7997subprocess.
7998
7999It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
8000but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
8001start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
8002connection permanently or until overridden.
8003
8004The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
8005file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
8006network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
8007coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
8008It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
8009system for one operation at a time.
8010
8011**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
8012files, subprocesses or network connections.
8013
8014**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
8015coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
8016The value is a cons cell,
8017 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
8018where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
8019the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
8020input to the subprocess.
8021
8022**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
8023change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
8024
8025** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
8026customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
8027you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
8028
8029You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
8030variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
8031information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
8032legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
8033customization.
8034
8035Thus, instead of writing
8036
8037 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
8038 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
8039
8040you would now write this:
8041
8042 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
8043 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
8044 :type 'boolean
8045 :group foo)
8046
8047The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
8048two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
8049describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
8050for a description of them.
8051
8052The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
8053should belong to. You define a new group like this:
8054
8055 (defgroup ispell nil
8056 "Spell checking using Ispell."
8057 :group 'processes)
8058
8059The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
8060group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
8061but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
8062to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
8063second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
8064
8065Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
8066package should have just one group; a more complex package should
8067have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
8068package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
8069first-level subgroups.
8070
8071** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
8072
8073This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
8074separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
8075
8076** easy-mmode
8077
8078The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
8079developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
8080only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
8081predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
8082`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
8083`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
8084
8085** Text property changes
8086
8087*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
8088text property.
8089
8090*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
8091previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
8092place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
8093functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
8094starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
8095
8096If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
8097LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
8098of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
8099position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
8100
8101*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
8102value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
8103is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
8104
8105** Changes in invisibility features
8106
8107*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
8108hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
8109is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
8110should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
8111would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
8112make the overlay visible.
8113
8114During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
8115invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
8116needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
8117which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
8118the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
8119t when it should hide it.
8120
8121*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
8122
8123Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
8124invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
8125and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
8126Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
8127manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
8128Here is an example of how to do this:
8129
8130 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
8131 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8132 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
8133 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8134
8135 ...
8136 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
8137
8138 ...
8139 ;; When done with the overlays:
8140 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8141 ;; Or respectively:
8142 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8143
8144** Changes in syntax parsing.
8145
8146*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
8147`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
8148obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
8149`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
8150
8151If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
8152is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
8153used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
8154
8155When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
8156character in the buffer is calculated thus:
8157
8158 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
8159 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
8160
8161 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
8162 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
8163 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
8164
8165 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
8166 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
8167 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
8168 determine the syntax type of the character.
8169
8170 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
8171 of the current buffer.
8172
8173*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
8174value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
8175for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
8176
8177*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
8178and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
8179only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
8180character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
8181another character with the same code (unless quoted).
8182
8183These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
8184text property.
8185
8186*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
8187arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
8188of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
8189
8190*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
8191(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
8192element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
8193nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
8194string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
8195
8196*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
8197syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
8198`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
8199
8200** Changes in face features
8201
8202*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
8203if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
8204
8205*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
8206of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
8207
8208*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
8209set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
8210
8211*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
8212set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
8213
8214*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
8215by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
8216and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
8217the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
8218overlay property).
8219
8220This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
8221arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
8222
8223** Changes in file-handling functions
8224
8225*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
8226directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
8227they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
8228is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
8229
8230This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
8231begins with ~.
8232
8233*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
8234it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
8235
8236*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
8237the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
8238
8239*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
8240as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
8241
8242*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
8243character code conversion as well as other things.
8244
8245Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
8246(formerly it did not).
8247
8248*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
8249environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
8250
8251*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
8252instead of constant strings.
8253
8254*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
8255to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
8256any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
8257
8258substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
8259in the same way as before.
8260
8261*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8262The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8263which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8264
8265*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8266error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8267else, and returns nil.
8268
8269*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8270directory cannot be listed.
8271
8272** Changes in minibuffer input
8273
8274*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8275read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8276additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8277argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8278ways:
8279
8280 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8281 It is available through the history command M-n.
8282
8283*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8284read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8285argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8286minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8287enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8288
8289In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8290argument in this way.
8291
8292*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8293from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8294minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8295
8296** Echo area features
8297
8298*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8299echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8300minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8301after the echo area is cleared.
8302
8303*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8304in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8305
8306** Keyboard input features
8307
8308*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8309set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8310
8311*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8312received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8313by keyboard macros.
8314
8315** Frame-related changes
8316
8317*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8318creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8319hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8320
8321*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8322the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8323has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8324
8325*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8326selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8327value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8328in the selected frame.
8329
8330*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8331is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8332which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8333
8334** X Windows features
8335
8336*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8337x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8338x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8339
8340*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8341The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8342
8343*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8344MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8345A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8346
8347If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8348it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8349
8350** Subprocess features
8351
8352*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8353functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8354automatically.
8355
8356*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8357and returns the output from the command as a string.
8358
8359*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8360and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8361
8362** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8363does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8364
8365** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8366at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8367goes after the other menu items.
8368
8369** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8370of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8371around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8372are in use.
8373
8374The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8375series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8376
8377Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8378after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8379form.
8380
8381** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8382is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8383but its hook is still run.
8384
8385** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8386for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8387
8388If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8389regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8390useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8391
8392This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8393are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8394filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8395warned.
8396
8397** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8398way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8399
8400** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8401integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8402functions like display-time.
8403
8404** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8405name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8406
8407** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8408can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8409is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8410
8411** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8412if there is an error in compilation.
8413
8414** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8415switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8416argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8417they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8418
8419** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8420Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8421the *scratch* buffer.
8422
8423** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8424The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8425where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8426e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8427
8428** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8429and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8430It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8431
8432** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8433using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8434variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8435and compose-mail-other-frame.
8436
8437** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8438can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8439full name of the specified user will be returned.
8440
8441** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8442of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8443where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8444in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8445option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8446files at all.
8447
8448** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8449and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8450width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8451the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8452
8453For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8454minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8455with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8456is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8457
8458** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8459
8460** imenu.el changes.
8461
8462You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8463item from menu created by imenu.
8464
8465An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8466#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8467select one of those items.
8468\f
8469* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8470\f
8471* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8472
8473** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8474mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8475
8476** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8477use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8478Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8479\f
8480* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8481
8482** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8483To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8484
8485** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8486conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8487matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8488expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8489word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8490all caps.
8491
8492** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8493at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8494
8495When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8496does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8497as in previous Emacs versions.
8498
8499** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8500non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8501time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8502frames.
8503
8504** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8505if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8506This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8507Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8508accident.
8509
8510** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8511keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8512It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8513line and then executing the macro.
8514
8515This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8516
8517** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8518(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8519characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8520characters.
8521
8522** Font Lock mode
8523
8524*** Font Lock support modes
8525
8526Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8527below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8528hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8529to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8530Font Lock mode is enabled.
8531
8532For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8533
8534 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8535
8536in your ~/.emacs.
8537
8538*** lazy-lock
8539
8540The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8541only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8542becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8543Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8544occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8545buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8546Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8547
8548To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8549
8550 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8551
8552To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8553
8554** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8555
8556*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8557paren and key.
8558
8559*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8560supported.
8561
8562** Gnus changes.
8563
8564Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8565commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8566significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8567previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8568
8569Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8570between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8571
8572*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8573variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8574obsolete.
8575
8576*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8577missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8578
8579 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8580
8581*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8582
8583 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8584
8585*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8586referred.
8587
8588*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8589
8590 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8591
8592*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8593
8594 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8595
8596*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8597buffers.
8598
8599 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8600
8601*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8602
8603 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8604
8605*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8606
8607 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8608
8609*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8610
8611 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8612
8613*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8614is possible.
8615
8616 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8617
8618*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8619groups of groups.
8620
8621*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8622
8623*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8624batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8625
8626*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8627
8628*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8629
8630*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8631
8632 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8633
8634*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8635expiration times.
8636
8637*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8638
8639*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8640process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8641
8642*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8643articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8644bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8645
8646*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8647articles with the `*' command.
8648
8649*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8650
8651*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8652
8653 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8654
8655*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8656
8657*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8658`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8659
8660*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8661buffer.
8662
8663*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8664
8665*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8666
8667*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8668
8669 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8670
8671*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8672
8673 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8674
8675*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8676
8677*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8678
8679*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8680
8681 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8682 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8683
8684*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8685refetching.
8686
8687 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8688
8689*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8690buffer to allow easier treatment.
8691
8692*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8693
8694*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8695
8696 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8697
8698*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8699articles.
8700
8701 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8702
8703*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8704
8705*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8706cited text to hide is now customizable.
8707
8708 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8709
8710*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8711
8712 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8713
8714*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8715
8716*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8717
8718The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8719in greater detail.
8720\f
8721* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8722
8723** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8724second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8725asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8726exists.
8727
8728** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8729as well as lists.
8730
8731** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8732of a given keymap.
8733
8734** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8735given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8736keymap or nil.
8737
8738** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8739an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8740name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8741menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8742equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8743alias.
8744\f
8745* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8746
8747** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8748
8749Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8750This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8751was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8752far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8753pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8754
8755For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8756you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8757`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8758
8759** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8760
8761The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8762do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8763It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8764much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8765chapter of the manual for details.
8766
8767However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8768customization variables take effect.
8769
8770** Marking with the mouse.
8771
8772When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8773highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8774using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8775
8776** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8777
8778*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8779
8780*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8781to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8782
8783*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8784in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8785you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8786application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8787applications, these problems are significant.
8788
8789If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8790likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8791However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8792will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8793other DOS application as a subprocess.
8794
8795Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8796You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8797
8798If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8799subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8800have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8801Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8802separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8803Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8804
8805** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8806
8807This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8808which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8809minibuffer contains.
8810
8811** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8812
8813The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8814It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8815It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8816affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8817
8818The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8819it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8820and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8821when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8822
8823** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8824enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8825
8826** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8827F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8828Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8829
8830If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8831menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8832something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8833the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8834
8835 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8836
8837** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8838to replace the characters it "deletes".
8839
8840** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8841
8842** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8843a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8844select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8845It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8846immediately after the selected one.
8847
8848This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8849made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8850
8851** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8852
8853Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8854directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8855If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8856Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8857recover-session.
8858
8859You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8860auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8861will not work.
8862
8863Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8864normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8865this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8866bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8867now that the bug is fixed.
8868
8869** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8870
8871There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8872when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8873Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8874which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8875
8876If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8877telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8878VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8879the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8880
8881** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8882Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8883is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8884
8885There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8886Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8887enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8888The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8889remain normal.
8890
8891** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8892header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8893
8894Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8895known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8896offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8897Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8898
8899Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8900of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8901a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8902name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8903documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8904`mail-directory-stream'.)
8905
8906** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8907skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8908characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8909with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8910
8911Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8912- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8913wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8914
8915The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8916less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8917headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8918Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8919Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8920fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8921to a limitation in font-lock).
8922
8923External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8924
8925** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8926buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8927buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8928this example:
8929
8930 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8931 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8932
8933** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8934
8935*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8936
8937*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8938
8939*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8940
8941*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8942entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8943will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8944isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8945(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8946The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8947
8948*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8949does the same job.
8950
8951*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8952"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8953
8954*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8955text.
8956
8957** Font Lock mode
8958
8959*** Global Font Lock mode
8960
8961Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8962new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8963font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8964turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8965on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8966
8967For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8968
8969 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8970
8971in your ~/.emacs.
8972
8973*** Local Refontification
8974
8975In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8976However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8977those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8978command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8979
8980In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8981(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8982current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8983above and below point.
8984
8985With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8986
8987** Follow mode
8988
8989Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8990buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8991side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8992they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8993split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8994follow-mode.
8995
8996M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8997
8998To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8999command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
9000
9001** hide-show changes.
9002
9003The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
9004to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
9005normal hooks.
9006
9007** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
9008The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
9009
9010** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
9011recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
9012those that begin a function, record, or macro.
9013
9014** MSDOS Changes
9015
9016*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
9017Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
9018
9019*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
9020and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
9021
9022*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
9023
9024*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
9025pressing both mouse buttons.
9026
9027*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
9028restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
9029are:
9030
9031**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
9032now works.
9033
9034**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
9035
9036**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
9037implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
9038
9039**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
9040
9041**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
9042
9043**** `M-x recover-session' works.
9044
9045**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
9046
9047**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
9048\f
9049* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
9050
9051** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
9052tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
9053remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
9054this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
9055behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
9056
9057** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
9058
9059The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
9060not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
9061need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
9062be different.
9063
9064It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
9065than `system-type'.
9066
9067See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
9068
9069** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
9070now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
9071
9072** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
9073that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
9074
9075** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
9076no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
9077reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
9078
9079The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
9080to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
9081like this:
9082
9083 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9084
9085SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
9086It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
9087becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
9088
9089REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
9090seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
9091means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
9092
9093*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
9094up if too much time passes.
9095
9096 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
9097
9098This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
9099If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
9100of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
9101form in BODY.
9102
9103*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
9104a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
9105call looks like this:
9106
9107 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9108
9109SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
9110runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
9111timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
9112ARGS.
9113
9114Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
9115command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
9116command.
9117
9118REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
9119time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
9120does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
9121each time Emacs becomes idle.
9122
9123If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
9124idle for SECS seconds.
9125
9126*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
9127all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
9128programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
9129instead.
9130
9131*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
9132there is no answer within a certain time.
9133
9134 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
9135
9136asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
9137within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
9138Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
9139
9140** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
9141arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
9142meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
9143arguments in between are ignored.
9144
9145This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
9146the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
9147
9148** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
9149/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
9150/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
9151site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
9152version.
9153
9154It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
9155version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
9156for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
9157has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
9158and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
9159problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
9160
9161** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
9162.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
9163systems with limited file name syntax.
9164
9165Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
9166convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
9167for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
9168completions.el:
9169
9170(defvar save-completions-file-name
9171 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
9172 "*The filename to save completions to.")
9173
9174This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
9175depends on the operating system, because the definition of
9176convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
9177Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
9178MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
9179
9180** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
9181rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
9182minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
9183
9184** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
9185marker from its buffer position.
9186
9187** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
9188Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
9189The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
9190
9191** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
9192that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
9193condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
9194of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
9195matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
9196regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
9197
9198This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
9199errors that happen often during editing.
9200
9201** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
9202into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
9203puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
9204
9205** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
9206now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
9207
9208** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
9209a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
9210name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
9211to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
9212and not get-buffer-window.
9213
9214** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
9215calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
9216being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
9217
9218If you use this feature, you should set the variable
9219buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
9220property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
9221non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
9222are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
9223property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
9224over and over for the same text.
9225
9226** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
9227
9228*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
9229in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
9230
9231;; @(#) HEADER: text
9232;; $HEADER: text $
9233
9234in addition to the normal
9235
9236;; HEADER: text
9237
9238*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
9239checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
9240lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
9241
9242
a933dad1 9243\f
3787e12e 9244* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
9245
9246----------------------------------------------------------------------
9247Copyright information:
9248
424d8b44 9249Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
9250
9251 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9252 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9253 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9254 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9255
9256 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9257 of this document, or of portions of it,
9258 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9259 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
9260\f
9261Local variables:
9262mode: outline
9263paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9264end: